PENTAX K-5 II, K-5 II s camera Operating Manual

PENTAX RICOH IMAGING CO., LTD.

2-35-7, Maeno-cho, Itabashi-ku, Tokyo 174-8639, JAPAN

(http://www.pentax.jp)

PENTAX RICOH IMAGING

FRANCE S.A.S.

(European Headquarters)

112 Quai de Bezons, B.P. 204, 95106 Argenteuil Cedex,

FRANCE

(HQ - http://www.pentax.eu)

(France - http://www.pentax.fr)

PENTAX RICOH IMAGING

DEUTSCHLAND GmbH

Julius-Vosseler-Strasse 104, 22527 Hamburg,

GERMANY

(http://www.pentax.de)

PENTAX RICOH IMAGING

UK LTD.

PENTAX House, Heron Drive, Langley, Slough, Berks

SL3 8PN, U.K.

(http://www.pentax.co.uk)

PENTAX RICOH IMAGING

AMERICAS CORPORATION

633 17th Street, Suite 2600, Denver, Colorado 80202,

U.S.A.

(http://www.pentaximaging.com)

PENTAX RICOH IMAGING

CANADA INC.

1770 Argentia Road Mississauga, Ontario L5N 3S7,

CANADA

(http://www.pentax.ca)

PENTAX RICOH IMAGING

CHINA CO., LTD.

23D, Jun Yao International Plaza, 789 Zhaojiabang Road,

Xu Hui District, Shanghai, 200032, CHINA

(http://www.pentax.com.cn)

http://www.pentax.jp/english

SLR Digital Camera

Operating Manual

• Specifications and external dimensions are subject to change without notice.

58288 Copyright © PENTAX RICOH IMAGING CO., LTD. 2012

R01DTI12 Printed in Philippines

For optimum camera performance, please read the

Operating Manual before using the camera.

Thank you for purchasing this PENTAX

I

/

J

Digital Camera. Please read this manual before using the camera in order to get the most out of all the features and functions. Keep this manual safe, as it can be a valuable tool in helping you to understand all the camera’s capabilities.

Lenses you can use

In general, lenses that can be used with this camera are DA, DA L, D FA and FA J lenses and lenses that have an s

position on the aperture ring. To use any other lens

or accessory, see p.56 and p.297.

Regarding copyrights

Images taken with the

I

/

J

that are for anything other than personal enjoyment cannot be used without permission according to the rights as specified in the

Copyright Act. Please take care, as there are cases where limitations are placed on taking pictures even for personal enjoyment during demonstrations, performances or of items on display. Images taken with the purpose of obtaining copyrights also cannot be used outside the scope of use of the copyright as laid out in the Copyright Act, and care should be taken here also.

Regarding trademarks

Microsoft and Windows are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the

United States and other countries. Windows Vista is either a registered trademark or trademark of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.

Macintosh and Mac OS are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries.

Intel, Intel Core, and Pentium are trademarks of Intel Corporation in the U.S. and other countries.

SDXC Logo is a trademark of SD-3C, LLC.

This product includes DNG technology under license by Adobe Systems Incorporated.

The DNG logo is either a registered trademark or trademark of Adobe Systems

Incorporated in the United States and/or other countries.

HDMI, the HDMI logo and High-Definition Multimedia Interface are trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing, LLC in the United States and/or other countries.

All other brands or product names are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective companies.

This product supports PRINT Image Matching III. PRINT Image Matching enabled digital still cameras, printers and software help photographers to produce images more faithful to their intentions. Some functions are not available on printers that are not

PRINT Image Matching III compliant.

Copyright 2001 Seiko Epson Corporation. All Rights Reserved.

PRINT Image Matching is a trademark of Seiko Epson Corporation.

The PRINT Image Matching logo is a trademark of Seiko Epson Corporation.

To users of this camera

• Do not use or store this camera in the vicinity of equipment that generates strong electromagnetic radiation or magnetic fields. Strong static charges or the magnetic fields produced by equipment such as radio transmitters could interfere with the monitor, damage the stored data, or affect the camera’s internal circuitry and cause camera misoperation.

• The liquid crystal panel used for the monitor is manufactured using extremely high precision technology. Although the level of functioning pixels is 99.99% or better, you should be aware that 0.01% or fewer of the pixels may not illuminate or may illuminate when they should not. However, this has no effect on the recorded image.

• There is a possibility that the illustrations and the display screen of the monitor in this manual are different from the actual ones.

• In this manual, SD Memory Cards, SDHC Memory Cards and SDXC Memory Cards are referred to as SD Memory Cards.

• In this manual, the generic term “computer(s)” refers to either a Windows PC or a

Macintosh hereafter.

• In this manual, the term “battery(ies)” refers to any type of batteries used for this camera and its accessories.

• The

I

and

J

can essentially be used in the same manner. In this manual, the explanations and examples are mainly for using the

I

.

J

users should refer to “About the

J

” (p.18).

1

For Using Your Camera Safely

We have paid close attention to the safety of this camera. When using this camera, we request your special attention regarding items marked with the following symbols.

Warning

Caution

This symbol indicates that ignoring this item could cause serious personal injuries.

This symbol indicates that ignoring this item could cause minor or medium personal injuries, or loss of property.

About the Camera

Warning

• Do not disassemble or modify the camera. High voltage areas are present inside the camera, with the risk of electric shock.

• If the camera interior is exposed due to dropping or otherwise damaging the camera, never touch the exposed portion. There is a risk of electric shock.

• Do not aim the camera at the sun or other strong light sources when taking pictures or leave the camera sitting in direct sunlight with the lens cap off.

Doing so may cause the camera to malfunction or cause a fire.

• Do not look at the sun or other strong light sources through the lens. Doing so may lead to a loss of eyesight or cause vision to be impaired.

2

• If any irregularities occur during use, such as smoke or a strange odor, stop use immediately, remove the battery or the AC adapter, and contact your nearest PENTAX Service Center. Continued use can cause a fire or electrical shock.

Caution

• Do not place your finger over the flash when discharging the flash. You may burn yourself.

• Do not cover the flash with clothing when discharging the flash. Discoloration may occur.

• Some portions of the camera heat up during use. There is a risk of low temperature burns when holding such portions for long periods.

• Should the monitor be damaged, be careful of glass fragments. Also, be careful not to allow the liquid crystal to get on your skin or in your eyes or mouth.

• Depending on your individual factors or physical condition, the use of the camera may cause itching, rashes or blisters. In case of any abnormality, stop using the camera and get medical attention immediately.

About the Battery Charger and AC Adapter

Warning

• Always use the battery charger and AC adapter exclusively developed for this camera, with the specified power and voltage. Using a battery charger or AC adapter not exclusive to this camera, or using the exclusive battery charger or AC adapter with an unspecified power or voltage can cause a fire, electric shock, or camera breakdown. The specified voltage is 100 - 240V AC.

• Do not disassemble or modify the product. This can cause a fire or electrical shock.

• If the generation of smoke or strange odor from the product or other abnormality occurs, immediately discontinue using and consult a PENTAX Service Center.

Continued use can cause a fire or electrical shock.

• If water should happen to get inside the product, consult a PENTAX Service

Center. Continued use can cause a fire or electrical shock.

• If you see a lightning flash or hear thunder during use of the battery charger or AC adapter, unplug the power plug and discontinue use. Continued use can cause damage to the product, fire or electrical shock.

• Wipe off the power plug if it should become covered with dust. Accumulated dust may cause a fire.

• To reduce the risk of hazards, use only CSA/UL certified power supply cord set, cord is Type SPT-2 or heavier, minimum NO.18 AWG copper, one end with a molded-on male attachment plug cap (with a specified NEMA configuration), and the other is provided with a molded-on female connector body (with a specified IEC nonindustrial type configuration) or the equivalent.

Caution

• Do not place or drop heavy objects on or forcefully bend the AC plug cord.

Doing so may damage the cord. Should the AC plug cord be damaged, consult a PENTAX Service Center.

• Do not touch or short-circuit the terminal area of the AC plug cord while the cord is plugged in.

• Do not handle the power plug with wet hands. This can cause an electric shock.

• Do not drop the product, or subject it to violent impact. This can cause the product to breakdown.

• Do not use the battery charger D-BC90 to charge batteries other than the rechargeable lithium-ion battery D-LI90. Attempting to charge other types of batteries may cause an explosion or heating, or may damage the battery charger.

3

About the Battery

Warning

• If any leakage from the battery should come in contact with your eyes, do not rub them. Flush your eyes with clean water and get medical attention immediately.

Caution

• Only use the specified battery with this camera. Use of other batteries may cause an explosion or fire.

• Do not disassemble the battery. Disassembling the battery may cause an explosion or leakage.

• Remove the battery from the camera immediately if it becomes hot or begins to smoke. Be careful not to burn yourself during removal.

• Keep wires, hairpins, and other metal objects away from the + and - contacts of the battery.

• Do not short the battery or dispose of the battery in fire. This can cause an explosion or fire.

• If any leakage from the battery should come in contact with skin or clothing, it may cause irritation to the skin. Wash the affected areas thoroughly with water.

• Precautions for D-LI90 Battery Usage:

USE SPECIFIED CHARGER ONLY.

- RISK OF FIRE AND BURNS.

- DO NOT INCINERATE.

- DO NOT DISASSEMBLE.

- DO NOT SHORT CIRCUIT.

- DO NOT EXPOSE TO HIGH TEMP. (140°F / 60°C)

- SEE MANUAL.

4

Keep the Camera and its Accessories out of the Reach of Small Children

Warning

• Do not place the camera and its accessories within the reach of small children.

1. If the product falls or is operated accidentally, it may cause serious personal injuries.

2. Wrapping the strap around a neck may cause suffocation.

3. To avoid the risk of a small accessory such as the battery or SD Memory

Cards from being swallowed by mistake, keep them out of the reach of small children. Seek medical attention immediately if an accessory is accidentally swallowed.

Care to be Taken During Handling

Before Using Your Camera

• When traveling, take the Worldwide Service Network listing that is included in the package. This will be useful if you experience problems abroad.

• When the camera has not been used for a long time, confirm that it is still working properly, particularly prior to taking important pictures (such as at a wedding or when traveling). Contents of the recording cannot be guaranteed if recording, playback or transferring your data to a computer, etc. is not possible due to a malfunction of your camera or recording media (SD

Memory Card), etc.

About the Battery and Charger

• To keep the battery in optimum condition, avoid storing it in a fully charged state or in high temperatures.

• If the battery is left inserted and the camera is not used for a long time, the battery will over-discharge and shorten the battery’s life.

• Charging the battery a day before use or on the day of use is recommended.

• The AC plug cord provided with this camera is developed exclusively for the battery charger D-BC90. Do not use it with other devices.

Precautions on Carrying and Using Your Camera

• Do not subject the camera to high temperatures or high humidity. Do not leave the camera in a vehicle, as the temperature can get very high.

• Do not subject the camera to strong vibrations, shocks, or pressure. Use a cushion to protect the camera from vibrations of motorcycles, automobiles, or ships.

• The temperature range for camera use is -10°C to 40°C (14°F to 104°F).

• The monitor may appear black at high temperatures, but will return to normal at normal temperatures.

• The monitor may respond more slowly at low temperatures. This is due to liquid crystal properties, and is not a malfunction.

• Sudden temperature changes will cause condensation on the inside and outside of the camera. Place the camera in your bag or a plastic bag, and remove it after temperatures of the camera and surroundings are equalized.

• Avoid contact with garbage, mud, sand, dust, water, toxic gases, or salt.

These could cause the camera to breakdown. Wipe the camera to dry off any rain or water drops.

• Do not press the monitor with excessive force. This could cause it to break or malfunction.

• Be careful not to overtighten the screw in the tripod socket when using a tripod.

5

Cleaning Your Camera

• Do not clean the camera with organic solvents such as thinner, alcohol, or benzine.

• Use a lens brush to remove dust accumulated on the lens or viewfinder.

Never use a spray blower for cleaning as it may damage the lens.

• Please contact a PENTAX Service Center for professional cleaning of the

CMOS sensor. (This will involve a fee.)

• Periodic inspections are recommended every one to two years to maintain high performance.

Storing Your Camera

• Do not store the camera with preservatives or chemicals. Storage in high temperatures and high humidity can cause mold to grow on the camera.

Remove the camera from its case and store it in a dry and well-ventilated place.

• Avoid using or storing the camera where it may be exposed to static electricity or electrical interference.

• Avoid using or storing the camera in direct sunlight or in locations where it may be exposed to rapid changes in temperature or to condensation.

6

Other Precautions

• The SD Memory Card is equipped with a writeprotect switch. Setting the switch to LOCK prevents new data from being recorded on the card, the stored data from being deleted, and the card from being formatted by the camera or computer.

• The SD Memory Card may be hot when removing the card immediately after using the camera.

Write-protect switch

• Do not remove the SD Memory Card or turn off the power while the card is being accessed. This may cause the data to be lost or the card to be damaged.

• Do not bend the SD Memory Card or subject it to violent impact. Keep it away from water and store away from high temperatures.

• Do not remove the SD Memory Card while formatting. The card may be damaged and become unusable.

• Data on the SD Memory Card may be deleted in the following circumstances. We do not accept any liability for data that is deleted if

1. the SD Memory Card is mishandled by the user.

2. the SD Memory Card is exposed to static electricity or electrical interference.

3. the SD Memory Card has not been used for a long time.

4. the SD Memory Card or the battery is removed while the card is being accessed.

• If the SD Memory Card is not used for a long time, the data on the card may become unreadable. Be sure to regularly make a backup of important data on a computer.

• Format new SD Memory Cards. Also format SD Memory Cards previously used with other cameras or devices.

• Please note that deleting data stored on an SD Memory Card, or formatting an SD

Memory Card does not completely erase the original data. Deleted data can sometimes be recovered using commercially available software. If you are going to discard, give away or sell your SD Memory Card, you should ensure that the data on the card is completely deleted or the card itself is destroyed if it contains any personal or sensitive information.

• The data on your SD Memory Card should be managed at your own risk.

Regarding Product Registration

In order to better serve you, we request that you complete the product registration, which can be found on the CD-ROM supplied with the camera or on the PENTAX website.

Refer to p.286 for details. Thank you for your cooperation.

Contents

For Using Your Camera Safely.............................................................1

Care to be Taken During Handling .......................................................4

Contents ...............................................................................................7

Composition of the Operating Manual ................................................13

Before Using Your Camera 15

I

Characteristics ............................................................ 16

Checking the Contents of the Package...................................... 19

Names and Functions of Working Parts .................................... 20

Capture Mode .....................................................................................21

Playback Mode ...................................................................................23

Monitor................................................................................................25

Viewfinder ...........................................................................................36

LCD Panel ..........................................................................................38

How to Change Function Settings.............................................. 40

Using the Direct Keys .........................................................................40

Using the Control Panel......................................................................41

Using the Menus.................................................................................42

Using the Mode Dial..................................................................... 45

Getting Started 47

Attaching the Strap ...................................................................... 48

Inserting the Battery .................................................................... 49

Charging the Battery...........................................................................49

Inserting/Removing the Battery ..........................................................50

Battery Level Indicator ........................................................................51

Using the AC Adapter (Optional) ........................................................52

Inserting/Removing an SD Memory Card .................................. 54

Attaching a Lens .......................................................................... 56

Adjusting the Viewfinder Diopter ............................................... 58

Turning the Camera On and Off.................................................. 59

Initial Settings .............................................................................. 60

Setting the Display Language.............................................................60

Setting the Date and Time ..................................................................62

7

8

Basic Operations 65

Basic Shooting Operation ........................................................... 66

Letting the Camera Choose the Optimal Settings ..............................66

Using a Zoom Lens.............................................................................68

Using the Built-in Flash ............................................................... 69

Setting the Flash Mode.......................................................................69

Using Built-in Flash.............................................................................72

Playing Back Images ................................................................... 73

Playing Back Images ..........................................................................73

Deleting a Single Image......................................................................74

Shooting Functions 77

How to Operate the Shooting Functions ................................... 78

Direct Keys Setting Items ...................................................................78

Rec. Mode Menu Setting Items ..........................................................79

Custom Setting Menu Setting Items ...................................................81

Setting the Exposure ................................................................... 83

Setting the Sensitivity .........................................................................83

Reducing Image Noise (Noise Reduction)..........................................85

Changing the Exposure Mode ............................................................88

Selecting the Metering Method .........................................................103

Adjusting Exposure...........................................................................105

Locking the Exposure Before Shooting (AE Lock)............................107

Focusing ..................................................................................... 108

Using the Autofocus..........................................................................108

AF Fine Adjustment ..........................................................................111

Selecting the Focusing Area (AF Point)............................................113

Adjusting the Focus Manually (Manual Focus).................................116

Checking the Composition, Exposure and Focus Before

Shooting (Preview) .................................................................... 118

Selecting the Preview Method ..........................................................118

Displaying the Optical Preview .........................................................120

Displaying the Digital Preview ..........................................................120

Using the Shake Reduction Function to Prevent Camera

Shake .......................................................................................... 122

Using the Shake Reduction Function ...............................................122

Shooting with Self-timer....................................................................125

Shooting with Remote Control (Optional) .........................................127

Shooting with the Mirror Lock-up Function .......................................130

Taking Pictures Continuously .................................................. 132

Continuous Shooting ........................................................................132

Interval Shooting...............................................................................133

Multi-exposure ..................................................................................136

Shooting while Adjusting the Settings (Auto Bracketing) ..... 138

Shooting while the Exposure is Automatically Changed (Exposure

Bracketing)........................................................................................138

Shooting while Adjusting Other Settings (Extended Bracketing) ......141

Taking Pictures Using Digital Filters........................................ 143

Shooting with Live View ............................................................ 146

Setting Live View ..............................................................................147

Taking a Still Picture .........................................................................149

Recording Movies ...................................................................... 152

Changing the Movie Settings............................................................152

Connecting a Microphone.................................................................154

Recording Movies .............................................................................155

Playing Back Movies.........................................................................157

Editing Movies ..................................................................................159

Using the Flash 161

9

Using the Built-in Flash ............................................................. 162

Flash Characteristics in Each Exposure Mode .................................162

Using the Slow-speed Sync..............................................................162

Using the Trailing Curtain Sync ........................................................164

Distance and Aperture when Using the Built-in Flash ......................165

Lens Compatibility with the Built-in Flash .........................................166

Using an External Flash (Optional) .......................................... 167

Using the P-TTL Auto Flash .............................................................168

Using High-Speed Flash Sync Mode................................................169

Using Flash in Wireless Mode ..........................................................170

Connecting an External Flash with an Extension Cord.....................173

Contrast-Control-Sync Flash ............................................................174

X-sync Socket...................................................................................175

Shooting Settings 177

Setting a File Format ................................................................. 178

Setting the JPEG Recorded Pixels ...................................................178

Setting the JPEG Quality Level ........................................................179

Setting a File Format ........................................................................180

Setting the White Balance ......................................................... 183

Adjusting the White Balance Manually .............................................185

10

Adjusting the White Balance with Color Temperature ......................188

Setting the Color Space....................................................................189

Correcting Images ..................................................................... 190

Adjusting Brightness .........................................................................190

Lens Correction ................................................................................193

Adjusting the Composition ................................................................195

Setting the Image Finishing Tone............................................. 197

Setting Custom Image ......................................................................197

Setting Cross Processing .................................................................200

Storing Frequently Used Settings ............................................ 202

Saving the Settings...........................................................................202

Checking the Saved USER Settings.................................................204

Using Saved USER Settings ............................................................205

Resetting to Default Settings ............................................................206

Playback Functions 207

Playback Functions Operation ................................................. 208

Playback Mode Palette Setting Items ...............................................208

Playback Menu Setting Items ...........................................................209

Setting the Playback Display Method ...................................... 210

Enlarging Images ....................................................................... 211

Displaying Multiple Images....................................................... 212

Multi-image Display Screen ..............................................................212

Displaying Images by Folder ............................................................213

Displaying Images by the Shooting Date (Calendar Display) ...........214

Joining Multiple Images (Index) ........................................................215

Playing Back Images Continuously ..................................................217

Rotating Images ......................................................................... 219

Deleting Multiple Images ........................................................... 220

Deleting Selected Images.................................................................220

Deleting a Folder ..............................................................................221

Deleting All Images...........................................................................222

Protecting Images from Deletion (Protect)........................................222

Connecting the Camera to an AV Device................................. 224

Connecting the Camera to a Video Input Terminal...........................224

Connecting the Camera to an HDMI Terminal..................................226

Processing Images 229

Changing the Image Size .......................................................... 230

Changing the Number of Recorded Pixels and Quality Level

(Resize) ............................................................................................230

Cutting Out Part of the Image (Cropping) .........................................231

Processing Images with Digital Filters .................................... 233

Applying the Digital Filter ..................................................................235

Recreating Filter Effects ...................................................................236

Developing RAW Images........................................................... 238

Developing One RAW Image............................................................238

Developing Multiple RAW Images ....................................................240

Changing Additional Settings 243

How to Operate the Set-up Menu.............................................. 244

Set-up Menu Setting Items ...............................................................244

Formatting the SD Memory Card .............................................. 246

Customizing Buttons and Dials ................................................ 247

Setting the Functions for the E-dials.................................................247

Setting the Functions for the Buttons................................................249

Setting the Beep, Date and Time, and Display Language ...... 252

Setting the Beep ...............................................................................252

Changing the Date and Time Display ...............................................253

Setting the World Time .....................................................................253

Setting the Display Language...........................................................256

Adjusting the Monitor and the Menu Display .......................... 257

Setting the Text Size.........................................................................257

Setting the Guide Display Time ........................................................257

Setting the Initial Menu Tab Displayed .............................................258

Setting the Status Screen Display ....................................................258

Setting the Display for Instant Review ..............................................259

Adjusting the Brightness of the Monitor ............................................260

Adjusting the Color of the Monitor ....................................................261

Setting the Electronic Level Display .................................................262

Setting the Folder/File Number................................................. 263

Changing the Naming System of the Folder.....................................263

Creating New Folders .......................................................................263

Setting the File Name .......................................................................264

Selecting the Power Settings.................................................... 266

Setting the Auto Power Off Function ................................................266

Selecting a Battery............................................................................267

11

12

Setting the Photographer Information ..................................... 269

Setting the DPOF Settings ........................................................ 271

Correcting Defective Pixels in the CMOS Sensor

(Pixel Mapping) .......................................................................... 273

Selecting Settings to Save in the Camera (Memory) .............. 274

Connecting to a Computer 277

Manipulating Captured Images on a Computer ...................... 278

Saving Images on Your Computer ........................................... 279

Setting the USB Connection Mode ...................................................279

Connecting the Camera and a Computer .........................................280

Using the Provided Software .................................................... 281

Installing the Software ......................................................................281

Screens of the PENTAX Digital Camera Utility 4..............................283

Appendix 287

Default Settings.......................................................................... 288

Resetting the Menus .................................................................. 296

Resetting the Rec. Mode/Playback/Set-up Menus ...........................296

Resetting the Custom Menu .............................................................296

Functions Available with Various Lens Combinations .......... 297

Using the Aperture Ring ...................................................................299

Cleaning the CMOS Sensor....................................................... 300

Removing Dust with Ultrasonic Vibrations (Dust Removal)..............300

Detecting Dust on the CMOS Sensor (Dust Alert)............................301

Removing Dust with a Blower...........................................................303

Using the GPS Unit .................................................................... 305

Displaying the Distance and Direction to the Destination (Simple

Navigation)........................................................................................306

Shooting Celestial Bodies (ASTROTRACER) ..................................308

Error Messages .......................................................................... 310

Troubleshooting......................................................................... 313

Main Specifications ................................................................... 315

Index............................................................................................ 321

WARRANTY POLICY.................................................................. 327

13

Composition of the Operating Manual

This Operating Manual contains the following chapters.

1 Before Using Your Camera

Explains camera characteristics, accessories and the names and functions of various parts.

2 Getting Started

Explains your first steps from purchasing the camera to taking pictures. Be sure to read this chapter and follow the instructions.

3 Basic Operations

Explains the procedures for taking and playing back pictures.

4 Shooting Functions

Explains the shooting-related functions.

5 Using the Flash

Explains how to use the built-in flash and external flashes.

6 Shooting Settings

Explains the procedures for configuring image processing and setting the file format.

7 Playback Functions

Explains the procedures for playing back, deleting, and protecting pictures.

8 Processing Images

Explains the procedures for changing the image size, applying digital filters and developing images taken in RAW format.

9 Changing Additional Settings

Explains the procedures for changing the camera settings, such as the monitor display settings and the image file naming convention.

10 Connecting to a Computer

Explains how to connect the camera to a computer, and includes installation instructions and a general overview of the provided software.

11 Appendix

Explains troubleshooting and provides various resources.

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

14

The symbols used in this Operating Manual are explained below.

1

Indicates reference page number explaining a related operation.

Indicates useful information.

Indicates precautions to take when operating the camera.

In this Operating Manual, the buttons of the fourway controller are referred to in the following way.

1

Before Using Your

Camera

Check the package contents and the names and functions of working parts before use.

I

Characteristics .....................................16

Checking the Contents of the Package ..............19

Names and Functions of Working Parts ............20

How to Change Function Settings ......................40

Using the Mode Dial .............................................45

16

I

Characteristics

1

• Features a 23.7×15.7 mm CMOS sensor with approximately 16.28 million effective pixels for high precision and a wide dynamic range.

• Features Shake Reduction (SR), an image sensor shifting shake reduction system. This enables you to capture sharp pictures with minimal camera shake regardless of the lens type.

• Features an AF sensor with 11 focusing points. The central 9 focusing points are wide cross area sensors.

• Features a viewfinder similar to that of a conventional 35 mm camera, with a magnification of approximately 0.92 and field of view of approximately

100%, for easier manual focusing. Also features a superimpose function in which the active AF point(s) on the viewfinder illuminate red.

• Features a large 3.0-inch monitor with approximately 921,000 dots, a wide viewing angle and brightness and color adjusting functions for high-precision viewing performance.

• Features a Live View function for shooting while viewing the subject in real-time on the monitor.

• Movies can be recorded by taking advantage of the lens properties. The camera can also output composite and HDMI video signals so that you can watch recorded still pictures and movies on a TV or high-quality monitor.

• A user-friendly design has been implemented in various parts of the camera. The large text size, high-contrast monitor and easy-to-use menus make the camera easier to operate.

• The body exterior is magnesium alloy, and the dials, buttons, joints, and retractable parts of the camera are dust-proof and water-resistant.

• Features the Dust Removal function to remove dust on the CMOS sensor.

• Features Hyper-program and Hyper-manual modes that let you take pictures with the intended exposure. Also features Sensitivity Priority

Automatic Exposure mode

K

that automatically adjusts aperture and shutter speed according to the set sensitivity, and Shutter & Aperture

Priority Automatic Exposure mode

L

that automatically adjusts sensitivity according to the set aperture and shutter speed.

• Features Digital Filters to internally process the image in the camera.

You can use digital filters such as Color or Soft while taking pictures or to process images after taking them.

• Features Custom Image which allows you to adjust settings while previewing the end result of the edited image, enabling a wider range of photographic expression.

• Records images in the versatile JPEG format or the high quality and fully editable RAW format. You can also select JPEG+RAW and record in both formats simultaneously. When the file format of the last captured image is JPEG, and its data still remains in the buffer memory, you can save the image in RAW format. RAW images can be easily processed internally by the camera.

• Up to five setting patterns can be saved as

A

mode. In addition, functions for the | /

Y

button and the e-dials can also be customized, enabling speedy operation by any type of photographer.

• Supports the optional Battery Grip D-BG4 with vertical shutter release button. If a battery (D-LI90) is inserted in both the camera and grip, the battery with more power is prioritized. This enables you to get the best camera performance for an extended period. By using a menu item, you can prioritize either one of the batteries in the camera and battery grip, and use its full power before switching to the other battery.

17

1

Shake Reduction (SR)

Shake Reduction (SR) on this camera features a PENTAX original system which uses magnetic force to move the image sensor at high speeds, compensating for camera shake.

The camera may generate some operating noise when it is shaken, such as when changing the composition of a picture. This is normal and not a malfunction.

The captured area (view angle) will differ between this camera and 35 mm SLR cameras even if the same lens is used because the format sizes for 35 mm film and CMOS sensor are different.

Sizes for 35 mm film and CMOS sensor

35 mm film : 36×24 mm

CMOS sensor on this camera : 23.7×15.7 mm

The focal length of a lens used with a 35 mm camera is about 1.5 times longer than that of this camera. To shoot images with an angle of view framing the same area, divide the focal length of the 35 mm lens by 1.5.

Example) To capture the same image as a 150 mm lens attached to a 35 mm camera

150÷1.5=100

Use a 100 mm lens with this camera.

Inversely, multiply the focal length of the lens used with this camera by 1.5 to determine the focal length for 35 mm cameras.

Example) If a 300 mm lens is used with this camera

300×1.5=450

The focal length is equivalent to a 450 mm lens on a 35 mm camera.

18

1

About the

J

Compared with the

I

, the

J

is superior in its ability to express the fine details, which enables taking even higher definition images.

Please note the following to enjoy the high resolution of your

J to the fullest.

Relationship between High Resolution and Aperture

When taking photographs in situations where the ability to record fine details is important, an open aperture up to an aperture of F8 is recommended to reduce the effects of diffraction. Try using an aperture higher than F8 in situations where false color or moiré are noticeable.

False Color and Moiré

While the

J

is more suited for expressing fine details than the

I

, false color and moiré are more noticeable.

For example, when sharpness is emphasized in Custom Image, the image may turn out looking unnatural in some cases. Be sure to take pictures while adjusting the balance between capturing fine details and image processing.

To check for false color and moiré, transfer images to a computer and view them at 100%.

JPEG Quality

If you are going to shoot in JPEG with the quality set to

E

or

D

, highdefinition images will not be captured and the ability to record fine details will diminish. Set [JPEG Quality] to

C

or

Z

as much as possible.

Camera Shake

High-definition images cannot be captured if camera shake occurs.

Prevent camera shake from occurring by using a tripod when necessary.

Checking the Contents of the

Package

The following accessories are packaged with your camera.

Check that all accessories are included.

Hot shoe cover F

K

(Installed on camera)

Eyecup F

R

(Installed on camera)

ME viewfinder cap

Sync socket 2P cap

(Installed on camera)

Body mount cover

(Installed on camera)

Triangular ring and protective cover

(Installed on camera)

19

1

Rechargeable lithium-ion battery D-LI90

Battery charger

D-BC90

AC plug cord

USB cable

I-USB7

AV cable

I-AVC7

Strap

O-ST132

Software (CD-ROM)

S-SW132

Operating Manual

(this manual)

20

Names and Functions of Working

Parts

1

Built-in flash

Strap lug

AF assist light

Self-timer lamp/

Remote control receiver

Lens mount index

Lens unlock button

Speaker

Microphone

Viewfinder

Microphone terminal

Mini HDMI terminal

(Type C)

PC/AV terminal

DC input terminal

Terminal cover

Monitor

Hot shoe

Strap lug

X-sync socket

Mirror

AF coupler

Lens information contacts

Diopter adjustment lever

LCD Panel

Image plane indicator

SD Memory Card slot

Self-timer lamp/

Remote control receiver

Cable release terminal

Card access lamp

Tripod socket

Battery grip contacts

Battery cover unlock knob

Battery cover

* In the first illustration, the camera is shown with the Hot shoe cover F

K

removed.

* In the second illustration, the camera is shown with the Hot shoe cover F

K

and the Eyecup F

R

removed.

If the terminal covers are not closed correctly, the dust-proof and waterresistant qualities of the camera will not be effective.

21

Capture Mode

Functions of buttons and dials used during shooting are noted.

The factory default setting of each part is explained here, but some parts have multiple functions and work differently depending on the selected setting.

1

2

3

4

5

7

8

9

0 a

6 c d

1 m

(EV Compensation) button

Turn the rear e-dial (

S

) while pressing this button to set the EV compensation

value. (p.105)

2 o

button

Turn the rear e-dial (

S

) while pressing this button to

set the ISO sensitivity. (p.83)

b e f g h i j k l m

3

Shutter release button

Press to capture images. (p.67)

4

Main switch

Move to turn the power on/off

(p.59) or to preview (p.118).

5

Front e-dial (

R

)

Changes the settings.

You can change the menu when a menu screen is

displayed. (p.43)

1

22

1

6

Lens unlock button

Press to detach a lens. (p.57)

7

E

(Flash pop-up) button

Press to pop up the built-in

flash. (p.72)

8

Mode dial lock button

Press to allow the mode dial to

be turned. (p.45)

9

Mode dial

Switches the exposure

modes. ( p.45

)

0

Metering mode switch

Changes the metering

method. (p.103)

a |

/

Y

button

You can assign a function to

this button. (p.249)

b

Focus mode switch

Switches between autofocus modes ( l

/ k

) (p.108)

and manual focus mode

(p.116).

c

Q

(Playback) button

Switches to Playback mode.

(p.73)

d

M

button

Changes the style of the

display on the monitor. (p.26)

e

Rear e-dial (

S

)

Changes the settings.

You can change the menu when a menu screen is

displayed. (p.43)

f

L

button

Records the exposure before

shooting (p.107) and saves a

preview image.

g

|

(Green) button

Sets the exposure mode to

Automatic Exposure and resets the settings.

h

AF point switching dial

Sets the focusing area. (p.113)

i =

button

Sets the focusing area and temporarily provides manual

focus. (p.110)

j

U

(Live View) button

Displays a Live View image.

(p.149)

k 4

button

When the control panel or a menu screen is displayed, press this button to confirm the selected item.

When the AF point switching dial is set to j

(Select), press this button to enable or disable changing the AF point.

(p.114)

l

Four-way controller

(

2345

)

Displays the Drive Mode/Flash

Mode/White Balance/Custom

Image setup menu. (p.78)

When the control panel or a menu screen is displayed, use this to move the cursor or change items.

When the AF point switching dial is set to j (Select), use this

to change the AF point. (p.114)

23 m 3

button

Displays the [

A

Rec. Mode 1]

menu (p.79). Press this button

when a menu screen is displayed to return to the previous screen.

1

Playback Mode

Functions of buttons and dials used during playback are noted.

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

0 a b c

24

1

1 m

(EV Compensation) button

Press in the enlarged view to increase the magnification.

(p.211)

2

Shutter release button

Press halfway to switch to

Capture mode.

3

Main switch

Move to turn the camera on

and off. (p.59)

4

Front e-dial (

R

)

Use this to display the next or previous image.

5 i

(Delete) button

Press to delete images. (p.74)

6

Q

(Playback) button

Press to switch to Capture mode.

7

M

button

Changes the style of the

display on the monitor. (p.30)

8

Rear e-dial (

S

)

Use this to change the magnification in the enlarged

view (p.211) or display

multiple images at the same

time (p.212).

9

L

button

When the file format of the last captured image is JPEG, and its data still remains in the buffer memory, press this button to save the image in

RAW format. (p.74)

0

|

(Green) button

Press in the enlarged view to decrease the magnification.

(p.211)

a 4

button

Confirms the setting you selected in the menu screen or playback screen.

b

Four-way controller

(

2345

)

When a menu screen or playback screen is displayed, use this to move the cursor or change items.

Press the four-way controller

(

3

) to display the playback

mode palette. (p.208)

c 3

button

Press to display the

[

Q

Playback 1] menu

(p.209).

25

Monitor

The various information appears on the monitor depending on the status of the camera.

The brightness and the color of the monitor can be adjusted. (p.260, p.261)

1

At Start-up or when Operating the Mode Dial

Guides appear on the monitor for 3 seconds (default setting) when the camera is switched on or the mode dial is turned.

1

P

Program

Automatic Exposure

2

RAW

AF

RAW

Enable AF

10/10/2012

P

10:30AM

Tv

Av

3 4

1

Exposure Mode (p.88)

2

Guide indicator

3

4

World Time (p.253)

Current date and time (p.62)

* 3 appears only when [World Time] is set to [Destination].

• Select [Off] for [Guide Display] in the [

R

Set-up 1] menu to not show guides.

(p.257)

• When the mode dial is set to

A

, the screen for selecting one of the

A modes from

A

1 to

A

5 is displayed for 30 seconds regardless of the

[Guide Display] setting. (p.205)

26

1

Capture Mode

While shooting, the status screen is displayed showing the current shooting function settings. You can change the type of the screen displayed by pressing the

M

button.

P

1/

2000

ISO

AUTO

1600

AF.S

F 2.8

±0.0

±0±0

-5 4 3 2 1 1 2 3 4 +5

AWB

JPEG 16

M

[

Status screen

37 ]

M

ISO AUTO Setting

Adjustment Range

ISO

AUTO

200-1600

HDR

OFF

JPEG 16

M

[

Control panel

37

]

M M

M

Blank Electronic level display

[Electronic Level] is P (Off) by default. Set in the [ A Rec. Mode 4] menu.

(p.262)

Status screen

(All items are displayed here for explanatory purposes. The actual display may differ.)

27

P

USER

1

SHIFT

1/ 2000

ISO

AUTO

1600

AF.S

F

2.8

+1.0

G1A1

-5 4 3 2 1 1 2 3 4 +5

AWB

JPEG

16

M

[

1234

]

8

1 2

9

3 4

8

8

13

8

15

11

16

14

12

17 18

19 20 21 22

5 6 7

10

23

24

25

26

1

1

Exposure Mode (p.88)

2

AE Lock (p.107)

3

Interval Shooting (p.133)/Multi-

exposure (p.136)/Extended

Bracketing (p.141)/Digital Filter

(p.143)/HDR Capture (p.191)

4

Shake Reduction (p.122)/

Horizon Correction (p.123)

5

Focus Mode (p.108)

6

Metering Method (p.103)

7

Battery level (p.51)

8

E-dial guide

9

Shutter speed

10

Aperture value

11

ISO/ISO AUTO

12

Sensitivity (p.83)

13

EV Compensation (p.105)/

Exposure Bracketing (p.138)

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

22

24

25

EV bar

Flash Mode (p.69)

Drive Mode (p.78)

White Balance (p.183)

Custom Image (p.197)

File Format (p.180)

JPEG Recorded Pixels (p.178)

JPEG Quality (p.179)

GPS positioning status

23

Flash Exposure Compensation

(p.71)

White Balance fine-tuning (p.184)/

Cross Processing (p.200)

AF point (p.113)

26

Remaining image storage capacity/

|

button guide

* Indicator 22 appears only when the optional GPS unit is attached to the

camera and is operating. (p.305)

28

Control panel

Press the

M

button in the status screen to display the control panel and change

settings. (p.41)

1

ISO AUTO Setting

Adjustment Range

ISO

AUTO

200-1600

JPEG 16

M

[

HDR

OFF

37 ]

4

8

12

2

5

9

13

16

1

6

10

14

3

7

11

15

17

1

Function name

2

ISO AUTO Setting (p.84)

3

AUTO AF Point Setting (p.113)

4

Highlight Correction (p.190)

5

Shadow Correction (p.190)

6

Distortion Correction (p.193)

7

Lateral Chromatic Aberration

Adjustment (p.193)

8

Cross Processing (p.200)

9

Extended Bracketing (p.141)

10

Digital Filter (p.143)

11

HDR Capture (p.191)

12

File Format (p.180)

13

JPEG Recorded Pixels (p.178)

14

JPEG Quality (p.179)

15

Shake Reduction (p.122)

16

Current date and time

17

Remaining image storage capacity

• Settings that cannot be changed due to the current camera setup cannot be selected.

• When [Status Screen] (p.258) in the [

R

Set-up 1] menu is set to P (Off), the status screen is not displayed.

• On the status screen, the setting currently being changed or guide display for the buttons that can be operated are displayed in blue (when [Status Screen]

(p.258) in the [

R

Set-up 1] menu is set to [Display Color 1]).

• The status screen will disappear if no operations are made within 30 seconds. Press the

M

button to display it again.

• If no operations are made within 30 seconds in the control panel, the status screen will reappear.

• [9999] is the maximum number of recordable images that can be displayed on the status screen and in the control panel. Even if the number of recordable images is 10,000 or more, [9999] is displayed.

29

Electronic level display

This camera is equipped with an electronic level for detecting whether the camera is level. When [Electronic Level] is set to

O

(On), press the

M

button while the control panel is displayed to view the electronic level. When [Electronic Level] is assigned to the | /

Y button, press the

|

/

Y

button to switch the display on/off.

A bar graph indicating the horizontal camera angle appears at the bottom of the screen, and a bar graph indicating the vertical camera angle appears on the right side.

Example:

1

Horizontally and vertically level (green)

Tilted 1.5° to the left (yellow)

Vertically level (green)

Outside horizontal level display (red)

Tilted 5° up (yellow)

Horizontally level (green)

Outside vertical level display (red)

• [Electronic Level] is

P

(Off) by default. Set in the [

A

Rec. Mode 4]

menu. (p.262)

• Refer to p.249 for assigning a function to the

| /

Y

button.

• The electronic level display will disappear if no operations are made within 1 minute.

• If the camera angle cannot be detected, both ends and the center of the bar graphs flash red.

30

1

When holding the camera vertically

If the camera is held vertically while measuring the brightness, the status screen or control panel is displayed vertically. The directions of the four-way controller (

2345

) also change to match the orientation of the camera.

To always display the contents of the screen horizontally, set in [Status Screen] of the [

R

Set-up 1] menu. (p.258)

ISO AUTO Setting

Adjustment Range

ISO

AUTO

200-1600

JPEG 16

M

HDR

OFF

[ 1234 ]

Playback Mode

The camera switches the types of information display when you press the

M

button during playback.

Standard

Histogram display

Detailed information display

No info. display

Captured image, file format, and guides are displayed.

Captured image and histogram (Brightness/RGB) are

displayed. Not available during movie playback. (p.33)

Detailed information on how and when the image was taken

is displayed. (p.31)

Only captured image is displayed.

AE-L

M

AE-L

JPEG

1/ 2000 F5.6

ISO

200

Standard

M

No info. display

1/

2000 F5.6

ISO

200

Histogram display

M

P

100-0001

M

AF.C

1/ 2000

F2.8

ISO 200

JPEG 16

M

10/10/2012

24mm

+1.5

-0.5

G2 A1

AdobeRGB

10:00AM

± 0

± 0

± 0

± 0

± 0

Detailed information display

31

The type of information display that is shown first during playback is the same as that of the last playback in the previous session. If [Playback Info Display] is set to

P

(Off) in [Memory] of the [

A

Rec. Mode 5] menu, the [Standard] screen

is always displayed first when the camera is turned on. (p.274)

Detailed information display

Use the four-way controller (

23

) to switch between pages.

(All items are displayed here for explanatory purposes. The actual display may differ.)

Page 1

Still Picture

AF.C

1/ 2000

F2.8

ISO 200

JPEG 16

M

P

24mm

+1.5

-0.5

G2 A1

AdobeRGB

10/10/2012 10:00AM

100-0001

± 0

± 0

± 0

± 0

± 0

1

2

11 12

3

7

9

13 14 15 16

8

20

23

21

24

4

17

26 27 28

32

5

10

18

22

25

19

29

33

6

30

31

Movie

MONO

F2.8

100-0001

10min10sec

G2 A1

Movie

FullHD

25

10/10/2012 10:00AM

± 0

± 0

± 0

± 0

± 0

3 5

2

34

35 36

20

37

26 27 28

32

24

14 38

25

4

6

30

31

1

Page 2

Still Picture/Movie

2

3

100-0001

N 36°45.410'

W140°02.000'

10/10/2012

0m

123°

10:00:00

2

3

1

2

39

42

44

39

46

5

40

41

43

45

6

32

1

1

2

3

5

Rotation information (p.219)

Captured image

Exposure Mode (p.88)

4

Shake Reduction (p.122)/

Horizon Correction (p.123)

Protect (p.222)

6

Folder number-File number

(p.263)

7

Drive Mode (p.78)

8

Flash Mode (p.69)

9

Focal Length

10

AF point (p.113)/

Autofocus Method (p.147)

11

Focus Mode (p.108)

12

Metering Method (p.103)

13

Shutter speed

14

Digital Filter (p.143)

15

Multi-exposure (p.136)/

Extended Bracketing (p.141)/

HDR Capture (p.191)/

Cross Processing (p.200)

16

Highlight Correction (p.190)

17

Shadow Correction (p.190)

18

Distortion Correction (p.193)

19

Lateral Chromatic Aberration

Adjustment (p.193)

20

Aperture value

21

EV Compensation (p.105)

22

Flash Exposure Compensation

(p.71)

23

Sensitivity (p.83)

24

White Balance (p.183)

25

White Balance fine-tuning (p.184)

26

File Format (p.180)

27

Recorded Pixels (p.152, p.178)

28

Quality Level (p.152, p.179)

29

Color Space (p.189)

30

Image finishing tone (p.197)

31

Custom Image parameters

(p.198)

32

Shooting date and time

33

DPOF settings (p.271)

34

Recording time

35

Sound setting (p.153)

36

Sound type

37

Drive Mode (Remote Control)

38

Cross Processing (p.200)

39

Information tampering warning

40

Photographer (p.269)

41

42

43

44

45

46

Copyright Holder (p.269)

Latitude

Altitude

Longitude

Lens direction

Universal Coordinated Time

* Indicators 42 to 46 appear only for images in which GPS information is stored.

Histogram display

The following histograms can be displayed when playing back still pictures. The “Brightness histogram” shows the distribution of brightness and the “RGB histogram” shows the distribution of color intensity. Press the four-way controller (

23

) to switch between “Brightness histogram” and “RGB histogram”.

1 2 3 4 4 2 3

33

1

5

AE-L

23

23

5

1

1/ 2000 F5.6

ISO 200

6 7 8 9

Brightness histogram

1 0

1

Histogram (Brightness)

2

Protect

3

Folder number-File number

4

Save RAW data

5

Switch RGB histogram/

6

Brightness histogram

File Format

7

Shutter speed

8

Aperture value

9

Sensitivity

10

DPOF settings

11

Histogram (R)

12

Histogram (G)

13

Histogram (B)

* Indicator 2 appears only for protected images.

* Indicator 4 appears only when the file format of the last captured image is

JPEG, and its data still remains in the buffer memory. (p.74)

11

1 2

AE-L

1/ 2000 F5.6

ISO 200

6 7 8 9 1 0

RGB histogram

13

If [Bright/Dark Area] (p.210) in the [

Q Playback 1] menu is set to O (On), areas affected by bright or dark portions blink (except when in RGB histogram display and Detailed information display).

34

1

Using the Histogram

A histogram shows the brightness distribution of an image. The horizontal axis represents brightness

(dark at the left and bright at the right) and the vertical axis represents the number of pixels.

The shape and the distribution of the histogram before and after shooting

(Dark)

←

Brightness

→

(Bright) tell you whether the exposure level and contrast are correct or not, and

Dark portions Bright portions lets you decide if you need to adjust the exposure and take a picture again.

1

Adjusting Exposure (p.105)

1

Adjusting Brightness (p.190)

When the image is too dark, the part to the left is cut off (dark portions with no detail) and when the image is too bright, the part to the right is cut off

(bright portions with no detail).

Bright portions blink red and dark portions blink yellow on the monitor when [Bright/Dark Area] is

O

(On).

1

Playing Back Images (p.73)

1

Setting the Playback Display Method (p.210)

1

Setting the Display for Instant Review (p.259)

Distribution of color intensity is displayed for each color in the RGB histogram. The right side of the graphs look similar for images that have

White Balance adjusted well. If only one color is lopsided to the left, that color is too intense.

1

Setting the White Balance (p.183)

35

Guide Indicators

The following indicators appear on the monitor to indicate the keys, buttons and e-dials that can be operated at that time.

Example:

2

3

4

5

R

S

Four-way controller (

2

)

Four-way controller (

3

)

Four-way controller (

4

)

Four-way controller ( 5 )

Front e-dial

Rear e-dial

3 button

|

4 button

Green button

L

button i button

Shutter release button

| /

Y

button

1

36

Viewfinder

1

The following information appears in the viewfinder.

2 3

1

1

4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

13 14 15 16 17 18 19

1

AF frame

2

Spot metering frame (p.104)

3

AF point (p.113)

4

Flash indicator (p.69)

Lit: when the flash is available.

Blinks: when the flash is recommended but not set or is being charged.

5

Focus Mode (p.116)

Appears when the focus mode is set to

\

.

6

Shutter speed

Underlined when the shutter speed can be adjusted.

Displays a countdown of processing time when the Noise Reduction

function is activated. (p.85)

7

Aperture value

Underlined when the aperture value can be adjusted.

[

nr

] blinks when the Noise Reduction function is activated. (p.85)

8

Focus indicator (p.67)

Lit: when the subject is focused.

Blinks: when the subject is not in focus.

9

EV bar

Displays the EV compensation values or difference between the appropriate and current exposure values when the exposure mode is set to a or

M

. (p.105)

Displays the camera angle when [Electronic Level] is

O

(On). (p.39)

10

ISO/ISO AUTO

Appears when the sensitivity is displayed.

11

Sensitivity/Remaining image storage capacity

Underlined when the sensitivity can be adjusted.

Displays the number of recordable images immediately after shooting.

Displays the compensation value while adjusting the EV compensation.

Displays the amount of deviation from the correct exposure when the exposure mode is set to a

or

M

and [Electronic Level] is set to

O

(On).

(p.100)

12

AE Lock (p.107)

Appears while the AE Lock function is activated.

13

Changing AF point (p.114)

Appears when the AF point can be changed with the AF point switching dial set to j (Select).

14

Multi-exposure (p.136)

Appears when Multi-exposure is set.

15

Metering Method (p.103)

Appears when the metering method is M (Center-weighted metering) or

N

(Spot metering).

16

Shake Reduction (p.122)

Appears when the Shake Reduction function is activated.

17

Flash Exposure Compensation (p.71)

Appears when the flash exposure compensation is in use.

18

EV Compensation (p.105)/Exposure Bracketing (p.138)

Appears when adjusting the EV compensation or when the drive mode is set to [Exposure Bracketing].

19

File Format (p.180)

Displays the image save format in RAW/RAW+ format.

Not displayed in JPEG format.

37

1

• The information is displayed in the viewfinder when the shutter release button is pressed halfway and during the meter operating time (default setting: 10

sec.). (p.104)

• The AF point(s) in use for autofocus appear in red (Superimpose AF Area)

when the shutter release button is pressed halfway. (p.113)

• When [Cancel AF] is assigned to [AF Button] in [Button Customization] of the

[

A

Rec. Mode 5] menu,

\

is displayed in the viewfinder while the

=

button is pressed. (p.110)

• [9999] is the maximum number of recordable images that can be displayed in the viewfinder. Even if the number of recordable images is 10,000 or more,

[9999] is displayed.

38

1

LCD Panel

The following information appears in the LCD panel on top of the camera.

3 4 5

1

2

6

7

8

9

10

11 12 13 14

1

Shutter speed/

Countdown of Noise Reduction

processing time (p.85)

2

Aperture value

nr

: Noise Reduction is

activated (p.85)

3

Multi-exposure (p.136)

4

Mirror Lock-up Shooting (p.130)

5

EV bar (p.105)/

Electronic Level (p.39)

6

EV Compensation (p.105)/

Exposure Bracketing (p.138)

7

Battery level (p.51)

8

Flash Exposure Compensation

(p.71)

9

Sensitivity/EV compensation value

10

ISO/ISO AUTO

Appears when the sensitivity is displayed.

11

Flash Mode (p.78)

b

: Built-in flash is ready

(when blinking, flash should be used)

>

: Red-eye Reduction

3

: Auto Flash Discharge

Q

: Slow-speed Sync

E

: Trailing Curtain Sync w

: Wireless

12

Drive Mode (p.78)

9 j

: Single Frame Shooting

: Continuous Shooting g

: Self-timer Shooting

W

: Remote Control Shooting

13

File Format (p.180)

1

: RAW capture

1

P

: RAW+JPEG capture

14

Remaining image storage capacity/USB Connection mode

(p.279)

Pc-S

: MSC mode

Pc-P

: PTP mode

LCD panel is illuminated when the exposure metering is performed. You can

choose [High], [Low] or [Off] for LCD panel backlight in [22. LCD Panel

Illumination] of the [

A

Custom Setting 4] menu.

Electronic level display

When the camera is not level, a bar graph indicating the horizontal camera angle is displayed in the viewfinder and on the LCD panel.

39

1

When level (at 0°)

When tilted 5° to the left

When held vertically and tilted 3° to the right

• [Electronic Level] is

P

(Off) by default. Set in the [

A

Rec. Mode 4]

menu. (p.262)

• The composition can also be adjusted in the camera when the camera

is stabilized using a tripod. (p.195)

40

How to Change Function Settings

1

Function settings can be changed using the direct keys, control panel or menus. Some functions can be changed using both the control panel and menus.

This section explains the basic ways to change function settings.

Using the Direct Keys

In Capture mode, you can set Drive Mode, Flash Mode, White Balance and

Custom Image by pressing the four-way controller (

2345

). (p.78)

Below, how to set [Flash Mode] is explained as an example.

1

Press the four-way controller (

3

) in Capture mode.

The [Flash Mode] screen appears.

2

Use the four-way controller (

45

) to select a flash mode.

Flash Mode

Flash On

3

Press the

4

button.

The camera is ready to take a picture.

MENU Cancel

0.0

OK OK

While direct key operation is enabled, the guide indicators for the direct keys

are displayed in blue (when [Status Screen] (p.258) in the [

R

Set-up 1] menu is set to [Display Color 1]). Direct key operation is not available when the AF point switching dial is set to j

and the AF point is being changed. In such cases, press and hold the 4

button. (p.114)

Using the Control Panel

While shooting, the current settings can be checked on the status screen.

You can also switch the display to the control panel and change settings.

Following, how to set [JPEG Quality] is explained as an example.

1

Check the status screen and then press the

M

button.

The control panel appears.

Press the

M

button when the status screen is not displayed.

1

41

2

Use the four-way controller

(

2345

) to select an item you want to change the setting for.

Items that cannot be changed for the current camera settings appear grayed out and cannot be selected.

ISO AUTO Setting

Adjustment Range

ISO

AUTO

200-1600

JPEG 16

M

3

Use the front e-dial (

R

) or rear e-dial (

S

) to change the setting.

JPEG Quality

ISO

AUTO

200-1600

HDR

OFF

[ 37 ]

HDR

OFF

JPEG 16

M

[ 37 ]

42

4

Press the

3

button or the shutter release button halfway.

The camera returns to the status screen and is ready to take a picture.

1

• Press the 4 button in Step 3 to display the detailed setting screen for the selected item. Make the detailed settings for functions such as Extended

Bracketing and Digital Filter on the detailed setting screen.

• The status screen and control panel are not displayed when Live View

(p.146) is displayed. Make or change necessary settings in the [

A Rec.

Mode] menu in advance.

Using the Menus

This section explains how to use the menus: [

A

Rec. Mode],

[

Q

Playback], [

R

Set-up] and [

A

Custom Setting] menus.

Following, how to set [Program Line] in the [

A

Rec. Mode 3] menu is explained as an example.

1

Press the

3

button in

Capture mode.

The [

A

Rec. Mode 1] menu appears on the monitor.

If the 3 button is pressed in

Playback mode, the [

Q

Playback 1] menu appears.

2

Press the four-way controller (

5

) twice or turn the rear e-dial (

S

) two clicks to the right (toward

y

).

1 2 3 4 5

File Format

JPEG Recorded Pixels

JPEG Quality

AF Settings

Lens Correction

Each time the four-way controller (

5

) is pressed, the menu will change in the following sequence: [

A

Rec. Mode 2],

MENU

Exit

[

A

Rec. Mode 3], [

A

Rec. Mode 4],

[

A

Rec. Mode 5], [

Q

Playback 1] … [

A

Rec. Mode 1].

JPEG

16

M

When the front e-dial (

R

) is turned to the right, the menu will change in the following sequence: [

A

Rec. Mode 1], [

Q

Playback 1],

[

R

Set-up 1], [

A

Custom Setting 1].

3

Use the four-way controller (

23

) to choose an item.

1 2 3 4 5

D-Range Setting

ISO AUTO Setting

High-ISO NR

Slow Shutter Speed NR

Program Line

Color Space

RAW File Format

MENU Exit

ISO

NR

AUTO

NR

AUTO sRGB

PEF

4

Press the four-way controller

(

5

).

Available settings are displayed in the pop-up menu or submenu.

1 2 3 4 5

D-Range Setting

ISO AUTO Setting

High-ISO NR

Slow Shutter Speed NR

Program Line

Color Space

RAW File Format

MENU Exit

ISO

NR

AUTO

NR

AUTO sRGB

PEF

5

Use the four-way controller (

23

) to select a setting.

Press the 3 button to cancel the pop-up menu, or return to the previous screen.

1 2 3 4 5

D-Range Setting

ISO AUTO Setting

High-ISO NR

Slow Shutter Speed NR

Program Line

Color Space

RAW File Format

MENU

Cancel

ISO

NR

AUTO

NR

ON sRGB

PEF

OK OK

43

1

44

1

6

Press the

4

button.

The setting is saved.

Press the 3 button if a submenu is displayed.

Next, set other items.

7

Press the

3

button.

The screen that was displayed before selecting the menu appears again.

Even after you press the 3 button and close the menu screen, your settings will not be saved if the camera is turned off improperly (such as by removing the battery while the camera is on).

• You can select whether to display the menu tab selected the last time first, or to always display the [

A

Rec. Mode 1] menu first. (p.258)

• Refer to the following pages for details on each menu.

• [ A Rec. Mode] menu

• [

Q

Playback] menu

1

1

p.79

p.209

• [

R

Set-up] menu

1

p.244

• [

A

Custom Setting] menu

1

p.81

Using the Mode Dial

45

You can switch the exposure modes by setting the icons on the mode dial to the dial indicator.

Turn the mode dial while pressing the mode dial lock button.

Mode dial

Dial indicator

1

Mode dial lock button

Mode

Lets you capture images with fully automatic settings.

Characteristics

B

Green e

Program Automatic

Exposure

K

Sensitivity Priority

Automatic Exposure

Automatically sets the shutter speed and aperture value to obtain a proper exposure according to Program Line when taking pictures. You can use the front and rear e-dials to switch between shutter priority and aperture priority.

Automatically sets the shutter speed and aperture value to obtain a proper exposure according to the set sensitivity.

b

Shutter Priority

Automatic Exposure c

Aperture Priority

Automatic Exposure

Lets you set the desired shutter speed for expressing the movement of the subject.

Lets you set the desired aperture value for controlling the depth of field.

L

Shutter & Aperture Priority

Automatic Exposure a

Manual Exposure p

Bulb Exposure

Automatically sets the sensitivity to obtain a proper exposure with the set shutter speed and aperture value according to the brightness of the subject.

Lets you set the shutter speed and aperture value to capture the picture with creative intent.

Lets you capture images that require slow shutter speeds such as fireworks and night scenes.

Page

p.90

p.91

p.92

p.94

p.95

p.97

p.98

p.101

46

1

Mode

M

Flash X-sync Speed

A

Characteristics

The shutter speed is locked at 1/180 second. Use this when using an external flash that does not automatically set the sync speed.

Lets you capture images with the saved exposure mode. Up to five settings can be saved.

C

Movie

Use this to record movies.

Page

p.102

p.202

p.155

2

Getting Started

This chapter explains your first steps from purchasing the camera to taking pictures. Be sure to read it and follow the instructions.

Attaching the Strap ..............................................48

Inserting the Battery ............................................49

Inserting/Removing an SD Memory Card ...........54

Attaching a Lens ..................................................56

Adjusting the Viewfinder Diopter ........................58

Turning the Camera On and Off ..........................59

Initial Settings .......................................................60

48

Attaching the Strap

2

1

Pass the end of the strap through the protective cover and triangular ring.

2

Secure the end of the strap on the inside of the clasp.

3

Attach the other end of the strap in the same manner as described above.

Inserting the Battery

49

Insert the battery into the camera. Use only a D-LI90 battery.

Charging the Battery

When using the battery for the first time, or when the battery has not been used in a long time, or when [Battery depleted] appears, recharge the battery.

Note: AC plug cord “Listed, Type SPT-2 or NISPT-2, 18/2 flexible cord, rated 125 V, 7A, minimum 6ft (1.8m)”

Indicator lamp

Lithium-ion battery

3

2

2

1 AC plug cord

Battery charger

1

Connect the AC plug cord to the battery charger.

2

Plug the AC plug cord into the power outlet.

3

Face the

2

mark on the battery up and insert it into the battery charger.

The indicator lamp is lit during charging and turns off when the battery is fully charged.

4

When the battery is fully charged, remove the battery from the battery charger.

50

2

• Do not use the provided battery charger D-BC90 to charge batteries other than D-LI90. Charging other batteries may cause damage or heating.

• Replace the battery with a new one in the following cases:

- If the indicator lamp blinks or does not light after the battery is inserted correctly

- If the battery starts to run down more quickly even after being charged (the battery may have reached the end of its service life)

The maximum charging time is approximately 390 minutes (it depends on temperature and remaining battery power.) Charge in a location where the temperature is between 0°C and 40°C.

Inserting/Removing the Battery

• Do not open the battery cover or remove the battery while the power is on.

• Insert the battery correctly. Inserting the battery incorrectly may cause a camera breakdown. Wipe the electrodes of the battery with a soft dry cloth before inserting.

• Be careful as the camera or battery may become hot when the camera is used continuously for a long period of time.

• Remove the battery when you will not use the camera for a long while. The battery may leak and damage the camera if left installed during prolonged periods of non-use. If the removed battery will not be used for six months or longer, charge the battery for about 30 minutes before storing it. Be sure to recharge the battery every six to twelve months.

• Store the battery in a location where the temperature will remain below room temperature. Avoid locations with high temperatures.

• The date and time may be reset if you leave the battery out of the camera for

long periods of time. If this occurs, follow the procedure described in “Setting the Date and Time” (p.62) to set the current date and time.

1

Open the battery cover.

Lift the battery cover unlock knob, turn it towards OPEN ( 1 ) to unlock, and then pull the cover open ( 2 ).

1

2

2

Face the

2

mark on the battery towards outside of the camera, push the battery lock lever in the direction of the arrow (

3

) and insert the battery.

Insert until the battery locks.

To remove the battery, push the battery lock lever in the direction of the arrow ( 3 ) with your finger.

3

51

2

3

Close the battery cover (

4

) and turn the battery cover unlock knob towards CLOSE (

5

) to lock.

Stow the battery cover unlock knob after closing the battery cover.

Battery lock lever

5

4

Battery Level Indicator

You can confirm remaining battery level by checking the w

/

A displayed on the status screen and LCD panel.

Status

Screen w

(Green) x

(Green) y

(Yellow)

F

(Red)

[Battery depleted]

LCD Panel

A

B

C

D

lit

D

blinks

Battery Level

Battery is full.

Battery is close to full.

Battery is running low.

Battery is almost empty.

The camera turns off after displaying the message.

(

D

continues blinking on the LCD panel.)

52

2

• y

,

F

,

C

or

D

may appear even when the battery level is sufficient if the camera is used at low temperatures or when performing continuous shooting for a long period of time.

• Battery performance temporarily decreases as the temperature decreases.

When using the camera in cold climates, have extra batteries on hand and keep them warm in your pocket. Battery performance will return to normal when returned to room temperature.

• Have extra batteries ready when traveling overseas, taking pictures in cold climates, or taking a lot of pictures.

Using the AC Adapter (Optional)

We recommend the use of the AC adapter kit K-AC132 (optional) when using the monitor for a long time or when connecting the camera to a computer or AV device.

The AC Adapter Kit K-AC132 includes AC Adapter D-AC120 and AC plug cord.

1

Make sure the camera is turned off.

2

Open the terminal cover.

3

Face the

2

mark on the DC terminal of the AC adapter towards the

2

mark on the camera, and connect the DC terminal to the DC input terminal of the camera.

4

Connect the AC plug cord to the AC adapter.

5

Plug the AC cord into the power outlet.

• Make sure the camera is turned off before connecting or disconnecting the

AC adapter.

• Make sure connections are secure between the terminals. The SD Memory

Card or data may be corrupted if disconnected while the card is being accessed.

•

W

is displayed on the status screen when using the AC adapter.

• Be sure to read the manual of the AC adapter kit before using the AC adapter.

• The battery in your camera will not charge when connected to the AC adapter.

2

53

54

Inserting/Removing an SD Memory

Card

This camera uses a commercially available SD Memory Card, SDHC

Memory Card, or SDXC Memory Card.

Make sure the camera is turned off before inserting or removing the SD

Memory Card.

2

• Do not remove the SD Memory Card while the card access lamp is lit.

• Use this camera to format (initialize) an SD Memory Card that is unused or

has been used on other cameras or digital devices. Refer to “Formatting the

SD Memory Card” (p.246) for details on formatting.

• Use a high-speed memory card when recording movies. If a write speed cannot keep up with a recording speed, the writing may stop during recording.

1

Make sure the camera is turned off.

2

Slide the card cover in the direction of the arrow and then lift it to open (

1

´

2

).

1

2

3

Insert the card all the way with the SD Memory Card label facing toward the monitor.

Push the SD Memory Card in once to remove.

4

Close the card cover and then slide it in the direction of the arrow (

3

´

4

).

4

3

Be sure to fully close the card cover. The camera will not turn on if the card cover is open.

For details on the approximate number of still pictures and amount of time of

movies that can be recorded on an SD Memory Card, refer to “Approximate

Image Storage Capacity by Size” (p.320).

2

55

56

Attaching a Lens

2

Attach a proper lens to the camera’s body.

When you use one of the following lenses with this camera, all the camera’s exposure modes will be available.

(a) DA, DA L, D FA, FA J lenses an (Auto) position, when used in the s position

• Turn the camera off before attaching or removing the lens to prevent unexpected lens movement.

• When attaching or removing a lens, choose an environment that is relatively free of dirt and dust.

• Keep the body mount cover on the camera when a lens is not attached.

• Be sure to attach the lens mount cover and lens cap to the lens after removing the lens from the camera.

• The camera body and lens mount incorporate lens information contacts and an AF coupler. Dirt, dust, or corrosion may damage the electrical system.

When necessary, clean the contacts with a soft dry cloth.

• When lenses described in (b) are used in a position other than s , some

functions will be restricted. Refer to “Using the Aperture Ring” (p.299).

• With factory default setting, the camera will not work with lenses other than

those listed above and accessories. Set [27. Using Aperture Ring] to

[Permitted] in the [

A

Custom Setting 4] menu to use them. (p.299)

• We assume no responsibility nor liability for accidents, damages and malfunctions resulting from the use of lenses made by other manufacturers.

1

Make sure the camera is turned off.

2

Remove the body mount cover

(

1

) and lens mount cover (

2

).

Be sure to put the lens down with the lens mount side facing upward to protect the lens mount from damage when there is no lens mount cover on the lens.

3

Align the Lens mount index (red dots;

3

) on the camera and the lens, and secure by turning the lens clockwise until it clicks.

After attaching, turn the lens counterclockwise to check that the lens is locked in place.

4

Remove the front lens cap by pushing the indicated portions inward.

3

To remove the lens

Attach the lens cap first, and then turn the lens counterclockwise while holding down the lens unlock button ( 4 ).

4

The body mount cover ( 1 ) is a cover to prevent scratches and block dust when shipped. Body Mount Cap K is sold separately and has a lock function.

57

2

58

Adjusting the Viewfinder Diopter

2

You can adjust the viewfinder diopter to suit your eyesight.

The Eyecup F

R

is attached to the viewfinder portion when the camera leaves the factory. The diopter can be adjusted with the eyecup attached.

However, adjustment is easier with the eyecup removed.

1

Remove the eyecup by pulling it out in the direction of the arrow.

2

Look through the viewfinder and slide the diopter adjustment lever left or right.

Adjust the lever until the AF frame in the viewfinder is focused.

Point the camera at a white wall or other bright and consistent surface.

AF frame

If it is difficult to see the viewfinder image clearly even if you use the diopter adjustment lever, use the optional diopter correction lens adapter M. However, the Eyecup F

R

must be removed to use this adapter.

Turning the Camera On and Off

1

Turn the main switch to [ON].

The camera will turn on.

Set the main switch to the position [OFF] to turn off the camera.

• Always turn the camera off when not in use.

• The power will automatically turn off when you do not perform any operations within a set period of time. To reactivate the camera, turn it on again or perform any of the following.

- Press the shutter release button halfway.

- Press the

Q

button, 3 button or

M

button.

• By default, the camera is set to turn off automatically after 1 minute of inactivity. You can change the setting in [Auto Power Off] of the [

R

Set-up 3]

menu. (p.266)

59

2

60

Initial Settings

2

The first time the camera is turned on after purchasing, the [Language/ u

] screen appears on the monitor. Follow the procedure below to set the language displayed on the monitor and the current date and time.

If the [Date Adjustment] screen appears, set the date and time by following the procedure

in “Setting the Date and Time” (p.62).

Date Adjustment

Date Format mm/dd/yy

24h

Date 01/01/2012

Time

Settings complete

MENU

Cancel

Setting the Display Language

You can choose the language in which the menus, error messages, etc. are displayed from the following: English, French, German, Spanish, Portuguese,

Italian, Dutch, Danish, Swedish, Finnish, Polish, Czech, Hungarian, Turkish,

Greek, Russian, Korean, Traditional Chinese, Simplified Chinese and Japanese.

1

Use the four-way controller (

2345

) to select the desired language.

2

Press the

4

button.

The [Initial Setting] screen appears in the selected language.

Press the four-way controller (

3

) twice and

proceed to Step 10 on p.61 if

W

(Hometown) does not have to be changed.

Initial Setting

New York

Text Size

English

Standard

Settings complete

MENU

Cancel

3

Press the four-way controller (

3

).

The cursor moves to

W

.

4

Press the four-way controller (

5

).

The [

W

Hometown] screen appears.

5

Use the four-way controller ( to select a city.

45

)

Turn the rear e-dial (

S

) to change the region.

Refer to “List of World Time Cities”

(p.255) for cities that can be selected as a

hometown.

Hometown

New York

DST

MENU Cancel OK OK

6

Press the four-way controller (

3

).

The cursor moves to [DST] (daylight saving time).

7

Use the four-way controller (

45

) to select

O

or

P

.

8

Press the

4

button.

The camera returns to the [Initial Setting] screen.

9

Press the four-way controller (

3

).

The cursor moves to [Text Size].

10

Press the four-way controller (

5

) and use the four-way controller

(

23

) to select [Standard] or

[Large].

Selecting [Large] increases the text size of the selected menu items.

Initial Setting

New York

English

Text Size

Standard

Large

Settings complete

MENU

Cancel OK OK

11

Press the

4

button.

12

Press the four-way controller (

3

) to select [Settings complete].

Initial Setting

English

New York

Text Size Standard

Settings complete

MENU Cancel OK OK

61

2

62

13

Press the

4

button.

The [Date Adjustment] screen appears.

2

• You can change the text size from the [

R

Set-up 1] menu later. In this manual, the menu screens hereafter are described with [Text Size] set to [Standard].

• When the hometown and the date and time are not set, the [Initial Setting] screen or [Date Adjustment] screen will be displayed again next time the camera is turned on.

Setting the Date and Time

Set the current date and time and the display style.

1

Press the four-way controller (

5

).

The frame moves to [mm/dd/yy].

2

Use the four-way controller (

23

) to choose the date format.

Choose [mm/dd/yy], [dd/mm/yy] or [yy/ mm/dd].

Date Adjustment

Date Format

Date

Time

/

01/01/2012

24h

Settings complete

MENU

Cancel

OK

OK

3

Press the four-way controller (

5

).

The frame moves to [24h].

4

Use the four-way controller (

23

) to select 24h (24-hour display) or

12h (12-hour display).

Date Adjustment

Date Format

Date

/

01/01/2012

24h

Time

Settings complete

MENU

Cancel

OK

OK

5

Press the

4

button.

The frame returns to [Date Format].

6

Press the four-way controller (

3

).

The frame moves to [Date].

7

Press the four-way controller (

5

).

The frame moves to the month.

8

Use the four-way controller (

23

) to set the month.

Set the day and year in the same manner.

Next, set the time.

If you select [12h] in Step 4, the camera switches between am and pm depending on the time.

9

Press the four-way controller (

3

) to select [Settings complete].

Date Adjustment

Date Format

Date

Time mm/dd/yy

24h

01/01/2012

Settings complete

MENU

Cancel

OK

OK

Date Adjustment

Date Format

Date

Time mm/dd/yy

24h

10/10/2012

Settings complete

OK

OK

MENU

Cancel

10

Press the

4

button.

The camera returns to the status screen and is ready to take a picture.

If you set the date and time from the menu, the screen will return to the

[

R

Set-up 1] menu. In this case, press the 3 button.

63

2

• When you press the 4 button in Step 10, the seconds value is set to 0. To set the exact time, press the

4

button when the time signal (on the TV, radio, etc.) reaches 0 seconds.

• Pressing the

3

button while setting the date and time cancels the settings made up to that point and switches the camera to capture mode.

• You can change the language and date and time settings from the menu.

(p.253, p.256)

64

Memo

3

Basic Operations

This chapter explains basic operations for shooting by setting mode dial to Green mode (automatic exposure according to the program line set to

j

) to ensure successful capturing.

For information about advanced functions and settings for taking pictures, refer to chapter 4 and onward.

Basic Shooting Operation ...................................66

Using the Built-in Flash .......................................69

Playing Back Images ............................................73

66

Basic Shooting Operation

Letting the Camera Choose the Optimal Settings

3

This camera features various exposure modes, focus modes, and drive modes for expressing your photographic vision. This section explains how to take pictures by simply pressing the shutter release button.

1

Set the mode dial to

B

.

Turn the mode dial while pressing the mode dial lock button.

The exposure mode changes to

B

(Green) mode. In

B

mode, a proper exposure is determined by the camera and the shutter speed and aperture value are automatically set.

2

Set the focus mode switch to

l

.

The focus mode changes to l

(Autofocus/Single) mode. When the shutter release button is pressed halfway in l

, the camera focuses

automatically. (p.108)

Mode dial lock button

3

Look through the viewfinder to view the subject.

A zoom lens can be used to change the

size of the subject in the viewfinder. (p.68)

4

Position the subject inside the AF frame and press the shutter release button halfway.

The autofocus system operates.

The focus indicator

]

appears and you will hear a beep when the subject comes into focus (focus lock).

The AF assist light turns on in a dark or backlit location, but the flash does not pop up automatically. If the flash is necessary, the flash status

E

blinks in the viewfinder.

Press the

E

button to pop up the flash.

1

Using the Built-in Flash (p.69)

Flash status

1

Selecting the Focusing Area (AF Point) (p.113)

5

Press the shutter release button fully.

Focus indicator

The picture is taken.

This action is referred to as “releasing the shutter” or “release”.

6

Review the captured image on the monitor.

The image appears for 1 second on the monitor shortly after capturing

(Instant Review).

1

Setting the Display for Instant Review (p.259)

You can magnify the image during Instant Review with the rear e-dial

(

S

). (p.211)

You can delete the image during Instant Review by pressing the i button.

1

Deleting a Single Image (p.74)

3

67

68

• Refer to p.90 for details on using

B

(Green) mode.

• The beep that sounds when the image is focused can be turned off. (p.252)

• You can set the camera so that pressing the = button will focus automatically, in the same way as pressing the shutter release button

halfway. (p.110)

• You can preview the image on the monitor and check the composition,

exposure, and focus before shooting. (p.118)

Using a Zoom Lens

3

Enlarge the subject (telephoto) or capture a wider area (wide angle) with a zoom lens. Adjust the subject to the desired size and take pictures.

1

Turn the zoom ring to the right or left.

Turn the zoom ring clockwise for telephoto and counterclockwise for wide angle.

Power Zoom (Auto Zoom) is available if a Power Zoom compatible FA lens is

used with this camera. (p.297)

Using the Built-in Flash

69

Use the built-in flash when you want to take pictures in low light or backlit conditions.

The built-in flash is optimum for a subject at a distance from 0.7 m to 5 m.

Exposure will not be properly controlled and vignetting (darkening of the corners of the image due to a lack of light) may occur when used at a distance closer than 0.7 m (this distance varies slightly depending on the

lens being used and set sensitivity. (p.165))

3

Compatibility of built-in flash and lens

Vignetting may occur depending on the lens being used and the shooting conditions. We recommend taking a test shot to check the compatibility.

1

Lens Compatibility with the Built-in Flash (p.166)

• When using the built-in flash, remove the lens hood before shooting.

• The built-in flash fully discharges for lenses without an s (Auto) position on the lens aperture ring.

For details on the built-in flash and instructions on how to take pictures with an

external flash, refer to “Using the Flash” (p.161).

Setting the Flash Mode

C

D

E

F

Flash Mode

Auto Flash

Discharge

Auto Flash+

Red-eye Reduction

Flash On

Flash On+

Red-eye Reduction

Function

Automatically measures the ambient light and determines whether to use the flash.

Discharges a pre-flash for red-eye reduction before the automatic flash.

Discharges the flash for each picture.

Discharges a pre-flash for red-eye reduction before the main flash.

70

3

G

H

I k r

Flash Mode

Slow-speed Sync

Slow-speed Sync+

Red-eye Reduction

Trailing Curtain

Sync

Wireless Mode

Function

Sets to a slow shutter speed depending on the brightness. When using this to shoot a portrait with the sunset in the background, both the person and the background are captured beautifully.

Discharges a pre-flash for red-eye reduction before the main flash is discharged with Slow-speed Sync.

Discharges the flash immediately before closing the shutter curtain. Captures moving objects as if they

are leaving a light trail behind them. (p.164)

You can synchronize one or more dedicated external flashes (AF540FGZ or AF360FGZ) without using a

sync cord. (p.170)

The flash modes that can be selected differ depending on the exposure mode.

Exposure Mode

B e

/ c

/

K b

/

L

/ a

/ p

M

A

Selectable Flash Mode

C

/

D

E

/

F

/

G

/

H

/

I

/ r

E

/

F

/ k

/ r

E

/

F

/ r

According to the saved settings

Restrictions

No flash compensation

-

-

-

1

Press the four-way controller (

3

) in Capture mode.

The [Flash Mode] screen appears.

The flash modes that can be selected for the set exposure mode appear.

2

Use the four-way controller (

45

) to select a flash mode.

Flash Mode

Flash On

When not in

B

(Green) mode, turn the rear e-dial (

S

) to perform the flash

exposure compensation. (p.71)

0.0

MENU

Cancel OK OK

3

Press the

4

button.

The camera is ready to take a picture.

Compensating for Flash Output

You can change the flash output in the range of -2.0 to +1.0. The flash compensation values are as follows for 1/3 EV and 1/2 EV.

Step Interval

1/3 EV

1/2 EV

Flash Compensation Value

-2.0, -1.7, -1.3, -1.0, -0.7, -0.3, 0.0, +0.3, +0.7, +1.0

-2.0, -1.5, -1.0, -0.5, 0.0, +0.5, +1.0

Set interval of steps in [1. EV Steps] of the [

A

Custom Setting 1] menu. (p.106)

1

Turn the rear e-dial (

S

) in the

[Flash Mode] screen.

The flash compensation value is displayed.

Press the

|

button to reset the flash output compensation value to 0.0.

Flash Mode

Flash On

+0.3

MENU Cancel OK OK

• The flash output compensation cannot be set in

B

(Green) mode.

•

N

appears in the viewfinder and on the LCD panel during the flash output

compensation. (p.36, p.38)

• When the flash output exceeds its maximum amount, the compensation will not be effective even if the compensation value is set to the plus (+) side.

• Compensating to the minus (-) side may not affect the image if the subject is too close, the aperture value is small or the sensitivity is high.

• The flash output compensation is also effective for external flash units which support the P-TTL auto flash mode.

3

71

Enabling Shooting while Charging the Flash

You can set the camera to enable shooting while the built-in flash is charging.

Set [20. Release While Charging] to

[On] in the [

A

Custom Setting 3] menu.

By default, pictures cannot be taken while the built-in flash is charging.

20.

Release While Charging

1

2

Off

On

Cancel

Enables shutter release while the built-in flash is charging

MENU Cancel OK OK

72

Using Built-in Flash

1

Press the

E

button.

3

The built-in flash pops up and begins charging. When the flash is fully charged,

E

appears in the viewfinder and on the

LCD panel. (p.36, p.38)

2

Press the shutter release button fully.

The picture is taken.

When the mode dial is at

B

, the flash is not discharged if the lighting conditions do not require flash for correction even when the flash is popped up.

[Flash On] is used if the flash is popped up when the mode dial is at a position other than

B

.

3

Push down on the portion indicated in the illustration to retract the built-in flash.

Playing Back Images

Playing Back Images

You can play back captured images with the camera.

1

Press the

Q

button.

The camera enters Playback mode and the most recently captured image (image with the highest file number) is displayed on the monitor. (For movies, only the first frame is displayed on the monitor.)

2

Review the captured image on the monitor.

Available operations

Four-way controller (

4

)/

Front e-dial (

R

) to the left

Four-way controller (

5

)/

Front e-dial (

R

) to the right

M

button

L

button

Displays the previous image.

Displays the next image.

Switches information display On/Off. (p.30)

Saves the RAW image (only when the data is available).

73

3

74

3

• When the file format of the last captured image is JPEG, and its data still remains in the buffer memory, you can save the image in RAW format by pressing the

L

button during playback.

If the image was shot using any of the following settings, the corresponding

RAW image listed is saved.

- Interval Shooting RAW image of the last captured image

- Multi-exposure RAW image with Multi-exposure

- Extended Bracketing One out of the three images can be selected

- Digital Filter

- HDR Capture

RAW image without filter effect

RAW image with standard exposure

- Cross Processing RAW image without Cross Processing

• Refer to “Playback Functions” (p.207) for details on the playback mode

functions.

Deleting a Single Image

You can delete images one by one.

• Deleted images cannot be restored.

• Protected images cannot be deleted. (p.222)

1

Press the

Q

button and use the four-way controller (

45

) to select an image to delete.

2

Press the

i

button.

The delete confirmation screen appears.

3

Press the four-way controller (

2

) to select [Delete].

Select a file format to delete for images saved in RAW+ format.

Delete JPEG

Delete RAW

Delete

RAW+JPEG

Deletes only the JPEG image.

Deletes only the RAW image.

Deletes images in both file formats.

4

Press the

4

button.

The image is deleted.

Delete

Cancel

OK OK

When deleting multiple images at once, refer to “Deleting Multiple Images”

(p.220).

75

3

76

Memo

4

Shooting Functions

This chapter describes the various basic and advanced shooting functions available with this camera.

How to Operate the Shooting Functions ............78

Setting the Exposure ...........................................83

Focusing .............................................................108

Checking the Composition, Exposure and Focus

Before Shooting (Preview) ................................118

Using the Shake Reduction Function to Prevent

Camera Shake .....................................................122

Taking Pictures Continuously ...........................132

Shooting while Adjusting the Settings

(Auto Bracketing) ...............................................138

Taking Pictures Using Digital Filters ................143

Shooting with Live View ....................................146

Recording Movies ..............................................152

78

How to Operate the Shooting

Functions

You can change capture-related settings using the direct keys, control panel, [

A

Rec. Mode] menu or [

A

Custom Setting] menu.

For details on how to use the direct keys and menus, refer to “How to Change

Function Settings” (p.40).

Direct Keys Setting Items

4

Press the four-way controller (

2345

) in

Capture mode to set the following items.

Key

2

3

4

Item

Drive Mode

Flash Mode

White Balance

5 Custom Image

Function

Sets Continuous Shooting, Self-timer,

Remote Control, Exposure Bracketing or Mirror Lock-up Shooting.

Sets the method of flash discharge.

Adjusts the color balance to match the type of the light source illuminating the subject.

Sets the image finishing tone such as color and contrast before shooting an image.

p.183

p.197

Page

p.132

p.125

p.127

p.138

p.130

p.69

79

Rec. Mode Menu Setting Items

The following settings can be performed in the [

A

Rec. Mode 1-5] menus.

Press the 3 button in Capture mode to display the [

A

Rec. Mode 1] menu.

Menu

A

A

1

2

Item

USER Mode

*1

Exposure Mode

File Format

JPEG Recorded

Pixels

*2

JPEG Quality

*2

AUTO AF Point

Setting

*2

*2

Lens Correction

*1

Expanded Area AF

*2

Cross Processing

*2

Extended Bracketing

*2

Digital Filter

*2

HDR Capture

*2

Multi-exposure

Interval Shooting

Composition Adjust.

Function Page

Switches between the saved

A

modes. p.206

Sets the exposure mode when the mode dial is set to

A

.

Sets the file format.

p.205

p.180

Sets the recording size of images saved in JPEG format.

p.178

Sets the quality of images saved in JPEG format. p.179

Sets the number of AF points when the focusing area is set to

S

(AUTO).

Sets whether to continue to focus on your subject based on information from the focus points surrounding the selected focus point if your subject briefly moves out from the selected focus point when the AF point switching dial is set to j

(Select).

Corrects distortions and chromatic aberrations occurring due to lens properties.

Changes the hues and contrast by performing digital cross processing.

p.113

p.115

p.193

p.200

Sets the Extended Bracketing shooting settings. p.141

Applies a digital filter effect when taking pictures. p.143

Enables capturing images with high dynamic range. p.191

Creates a composite picture by taking multiple frames.

p.136

Takes pictures at a set interval from a set time. p.133

Adjusts the composition of your image using the Shake Reduction mechanism.

p.195

4

80

4

Menu

A

A

A

3

4

5

Item

D-Range Setting

Slow Shutter Speed

NR

Program Line

Color Space

Movie

Live View

Instant Review

Digital Preview

*2

ISO AUTO Setting

High-ISO NR

RAW File Format

Electronic Level

Horizon Correction

Shake Reduction

GPS

*2

Input Focal Length

*2

E-Dial Programming

Button Customization

Memory

Save USER Mode

Function

Expands the dynamic range and prevents bright and dark areas from occurring.

Sets the range of automatic correction in

ISO AUTO.

Sets whether to use Noise Reduction when shooting with a high ISO sensitivity.

Sets whether to use Noise Reduction in slow speed shooting.

Page

p.190

p.84

p.85

p.87

Selects Program Line.

Sets the color space to use.

Sets the file format of images saved in

RAW format.

p.89

p.189

p.181

Sets the movie settings.

Sets the Live View settings.

p.152

p.147

Sets whether to display the electronic level which detects whether the camera is level.

p.262

Corrects the tilt (right and left) of the image. p.123

Reduces vertical and horizontal camera shake.

Sets the focal length when using a lens whose focal length information cannot be obtained.

Sets the functions for when the optional

GPS unit is attached to the camera.

p.122

p.124

p.305

Sets the Instant Review display settings. p.259

Sets the Digital Preview settings.

p.119

Sets the functions assigned to the e-dials in each exposure mode.

Sets the functions for when the | /

Y button, = button, or Preview dial is operated, or the shutter release button is pressed halfway.

Determines which settings to save when the power is turned off.

Saves the current camera settings as

A

.

p.247

p.249

p.274

p.202

*1 Appears only when the mode dial is set to

A

.

*2 Can also be set using the control panel.

81

Custom Setting Menu Setting Items

Set the [

A

Custom Setting 1-4] menus to fully use the functions of a SLR camera.

Menu

A

A

1

2

Item

1. EV Steps

2. Sensitivity Steps

Function Page

Sets the adjustment steps for exposure. p.106

Sets the adjustment steps for ISO sensitivity.

Expands the lower and upper sensitivity limits.

p.84

p.84

3. Expanded

Sensitivity

4. Meter Operating

Time

5. AE-L with AF

Locked

Sets the exposure metering time.

6. Link AE to AF Point

7. Auto EV

Compensation

8. Auto Bracketing

Order

9. One-Push

Bracketing

10. WB Adjustable

Range

11. WB When Using

Flash

12. AWB in Tungsten

Light

13. Color Temperature

Steps

14. Superimpose AF

Area

Sets whether to lock the exposure value when the focus is locked.

Sets whether to link the exposure and

AF point in the focusing area during multi-segment metering.

Sets whether to automatically compensate when the proper exposure cannot be determined.

Sets the order for Auto Bracketing shooting.

Sets whether to shoot all frames with one press of the shutter release button when using Exposure Bracketing.

Sets whether to automatically fine-tune the white balance when specifying the light source on the white balance setting.

Sets the white balance setting when using flash.

Sets whether to adjust the tungsten light color tone when the white balance is set to

F

(Auto White Balance).

Sets the adjustment steps for color temperature.

Sets whether to display the active AF point(s) in red in the viewfinder.

p.104

p.115

p.104

-

p.138

p.140

p.185

p.185

-

p.188

p.113

4

82

4

Menu

A

A

3

4

Control

Charging

Mode

Item

15. AF.S Setting

16. AF.C Setting

17. AF Assist Light

18. AF with Remote

19. Remote Control in

Bulb

20. Release While

21. Flash in Wireless

22. LCD Panel

Illumination

23. Saving Rotation

Info

Function

Sets the action priority for when the focus mode is set to l

and the shutter release button is fully pressed.

Sets the action priority for Continuous

Shooting when the focus mode is set to k

.

Sets whether to use the AF assist light when autofocusing in dark locations.

Sets whether to use autofocus when shooting with remote control.

Sets the remote control operation when using the remote control in p

(Bulb

Exposure) mode.

Sets whether to release shutter while the built-in flash is charging.

Sets the built-in flash discharge method in wireless mode.

Sets the illumination for the LCD panel.

Page

p.109

p.109

p.109

p.129

p.102

p.71

p.172

p.38

p.219

24. Save Menu

Location

25. Catch-in Focus

Sets whether to save rotation information when shooting.

Sets whether to save the last menu tab displayed on the monitor and to display it again the next time the 3 button is pressed.

When set to [On], if the focus mode is set to l and a manual focus lens is attached, Catch-in Focus shooting is enabled and the shutter is released automatically when the subject comes into focus.

p.258

p.117

26. AF Fine

Adjustment

Adjusts the AF focusing position.

p.111

27. Using Aperture

Ring

Reset Custom

Functions

Sets whether to enable shutter release when the lens aperture ring is set to the position other than s

.

Resets all the settings in the [

A

Custom

Setting 1-4] menus to the defaults.

p.299

p.296

Setting the Exposure

Setting the Sensitivity

You can set the sensitivity to suit the brightness of the surroundings.

The sensitivity can be set to [ISO AUTO] or within a sensitivity range equivalent to ISO 100 to 12800. The default setting is [ISO AUTO].

1

Turn the rear e-dial (

S

) while pressing the

o

button in

Capture mode.

The sensitivity displayed on the status screen and LCD panel and in the viewfinder changes.

Press the

|

button to set the sensitivity to

[ISO AUTO].

P

1/ 200

ISO

AUTO

200

AF.S

F

5.0

-5 4 3 2 1 1 2 3 4 +5

AWB

JPEG 16

M

ISO AUTO

2

Take your finger off the

o

button and rear e-dial (

S

).

The sensitivity is set.

4

83

84

4

• The sensitivity can also be changed by pressing the o button once, taking your finger off the button and turning the rear e-dial (

S

). In this case, the sensitivity is fixed when the o button is pressed again or the exposure

metering timer (p.104) elapses.

• When the exposure mode is set to

B

(Green),

L

(Shutter & Aperture

Priority Automatic Exposure) or

C

(Movie), the sensitivity is fixed to [ISO

AUTO] and the setting cannot be changed.

• When the exposure mode is set to

K

(Sensitivity Priority Automatic

Exposure), a (Manual Exposure), p (Bulb Exposure) or

M

(Flash X-sync

Speed), the sensitivity cannot be set to [ISO AUTO].

• The sensitivity range can be expanded to a range of ISO 80 to 51200 when

[3. Expanded Sensitivity] in the [

A

Custom Setting 1] menu is set to [On].

However, the minimum sensitivity is ISO 160 when [Highlight Correction] is

set to [On] in [D-Range Setting] (p.190) of the [

A

Rec. Mode 3] menu.

• Captured images may show more noise if a higher sensitivity is set. You can

reduce image noise by setting [High-ISO NR] in the [

A

Rec. Mode 3] menu. (p.85)

• You can select whether to set the sensitivity in increments of 1 EV or in

accordance with the EV step setting for exposure (p.106). This can be set in

[2. Sensitivity Steps] of the [

A

Custom Setting 1] menu.

Setting the Range of Automatic Sensitivity Correction

Set the range in which the sensitivity is automatically adjusted when the sensitivity is set to [ISO AUTO]. The sensitivity is automatically corrected in the range of [ISO 100-3200] by default.

1

Select [ISO AUTO Setting] in the [

A

Rec. Mode 3] menu and press the four-way controller (

5

).

The [ISO AUTO Setting] screen appears.

2

Press the four-way controller (

5

) and use the four-way controller

(

23

) to set the minimum sensitivity.

ISO AUTO Setting

ISOAUTO 100 3200

AUTO ISO Parameters

MENU Cancel OK OK

3

Press the four-way controller (

5

) and use the four-way controller (

23

) to set the maximum sensitivity.

4

Press the

4

button.

5

Use the four-way controller (

23

) to select [AUTO ISO

Parameters] and press the four-way controller (

5

).

6

Use the four-way controller (

23

) to select the parameter and press the

4

button.

ISO AUTO Setting

ISOAUTO 100 3200

AUTO ISO Parameters

u s

Slow

Increases the sensitivity as little as possible

Standard (default setting) a

Fast

Actively increases the sensitivity

MENU

7

Press the

3

button twice.

The screen that was displayed before selecting the menu appears again.

85

4

Reducing Image Noise (Noise Reduction)

When shooting with a digital camera, image noise (image roughness or unevenness) becomes noticeable in the following situations.

- when shooting with a long exposure

- when shooting with a high sensitivity setting

- when the temperature of the CMOS sensor is high

You can reduce image noise by using Noise Reduction. However, images shot with Noise Reduction will take longer to save.

High-ISO NR

Reduces noise at high sensitivity (ISO) settings.

1

Select [High-ISO NR] in the [

A

Rec. Mode 3] menu and press the four-way controller (

5

).

The [High-ISO NR] screen appears.

86

2

Press the four-way controller (

5

) and use the four-way controller

(

23

) to select [Auto], [Off],

[Low], [Medium], [High] or

[Custom].

High-ISO NR

ISO

NR

AUTO

ISO

NR

OFF

ISO

NR

ISO

NR

ISO

NR

ISO

NR

CUSTOM

Auto

Off

Low

Medium

High

Custom

4

MENU Cancel OK OK

Auto

Off

Low/Medium/

High

Custom

Applies Noise Reduction at optimally calculated levels throughout ISO range. (default setting)

Does not apply Noise Reduction at any ISO setting.

Applies Noise Reduction at constant chosen level throughout ISO range.

Applies Noise Reduction at user-defined levels for each ISO setting.

3

Press the

4

button.

If you select [Auto], [Off], [Low], [Medium], or [High], proceed to Step 7.

4

Use the four-way controller (

23

) to select [Setting] and press the four-way controller (

5

).

The screen to set the noise reduction level according to the sensitivity appears.

5

Use the four-way controller (

23

) to select a sensitivity value and use

High-ISO NR 1 2 the four-way controller (

45

) to set the level of noise reduction which is applied to the selected sensitivity.

ISO

ISO

ISO

ISO

ISO

80

100

200

400

800

ISO

NR

ISO

NR

ISO

NR

ISO

NR

ISO

NR

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

Turn the rear e-dial (

S

) to display the

[High-ISO NR 2] screen.

ISO

ISO

1600

3200

ISO

NR

ISO

NR

MENU Reset

Press the

|

button to reset the setting of the selected sensitivity value.

The sensitivity values displayed vary according to the [1. EV Steps] and [2.

Sensitivity Steps] settings made in the [

A

Custom Setting 1] menu.

6

Press the

3

button.

The screen that was displayed in Step 2 appears again.

7

Press the

3

button twice.

The camera is ready to take a picture.

Slow Shutter Speed NR

Reduces noise during long exposures.

1

Select [Slow Shutter Speed NR] in the [

A

Rec. Mode 3] menu and press the four-way controller (

5

).

2

Use the four-way controller (

23

) to select [Auto], [On] or [Off], and press the

4

button.

1 2

3

4

D-Range Setting

ISO AUTO Setting

High-ISO NR

Slow Shutter Speed NR

Program Line

Color Space

RAW File Format

MENU Cancel

ISO

NR

AUTO

NR

AUTO

NR

ON

NR

OFF

PEF

OK OK

Auto

On

Off

Determines conditions such as shutter speed, sensitivity, and internal temperature, and automatically applies Noise

Reduction as necessary. (default setting)

Applies Noise Reduction when the exposure time is longer than 1 second.

Does not apply Noise Reduction.

3

Press the

3

button.

The camera is ready to take a picture.

• Processing may take a while when shooting with Slow Shutter Speed NR set to [On]. Pictures cannot be taken while an image is being processed.

• When the Noise Reduction function is activated, [

nr

] blinks on the LCD panel and in the viewfinder where the aperture value is normally displayed, and a countdown of processing time is displayed where the shutter speed is normally displayed.

4

87

88

Changing the Exposure Mode

4

This camera features the following exposure modes. Use the mode dial to

change the exposure mode. (p.45)

The settings available for each exposure mode are as follows.

( z

: Available

×

: Not available)

Exposure Mode

Change

Shutter

Speed

Change

Aperture

Value

Change

Sensitivity

EV

Compensation

Page

B

Green e

Program Automatic Exposure

K

Sensitivity Priority Automatic

Exposure b

Shutter Priority Automatic

Exposure c

Aperture Priority Automatic

Exposure

L

Shutter & Aperture Priority

Automatic Exposure a

Manual Exposure p

Bulb Exposure

M

Flash X-sync Speed

× z

× z

× z z

×

×

× z

×

× z z z z z

× z

Other than

ISO AUTO z z

ISO AUTO only

Other than

ISO AUTO

Other than

ISO AUTO

Other than

ISO AUTO

× z

p.91

z

p.92

z

p.94

z

p.95

z

p.97

–

×

–

p.90

p.98

p.101

p.102

For each exposure mode, you can set the functions for when the front/rear e-dial or the

|

button is operated. Set in [E-Dial Programming] of the [

A

Rec.

Mode 5] menu. (p.247) You can confirm the functions of the front and rear

e-dials and the

|

button by viewing the guides which appear on the monitor

when the camera is switched on or the mode dial is turned. (p.25)

89

Program Line

In [Program Line] of the [

A

Rec. Mode 3] menu, you can choose from the following Program Lines. When [ e LINE] is selected for the

| button setting in e /

K

mode or

L

/ a

mode (p.247), exposure is

regulated according to the set Program Line.

j k

Setting

Auto

Normal l

Hi-speed Priority m n o

DOF Priority

(deep)

DOF Priority

(shallow)

MTF Priority

Characteristics

Camera determines the appropriate settings.

Basic Program Automatic Exposure (default setting)

Program Automatic Exposure that prioritizes high shutter speeds.

Program Automatic Exposure that closes the aperture as much as possible for a deep depth of field.

Program Automatic Exposure that opens the aperture as much as possible for a shallow depth of field.

Program Automatic Exposure that prioritizes the best aperture settings for the attached lens when a DA, DA L, D FA, FA J or FA lens is used.

4

Using a Lens with an Aperture Ring

When using a lens with an aperture ring, set the aperture to the s

(AUTO) position while holding down the autolock button on the lens.

90

4

Using the

B

Mode

Lets you capture images with fully automatic settings.

In

B

mode, pictures are taken with the following settings.

• Program Line

• File Format

• Sensitivity

• Metering Method j

(AUTO)

JPEG

ISO AUTO

L

(Multi-segment Metering)

• AF Point

S

(Auto)

• AUTO AF Point Setting 11 AF Points

• White Balance

• Custom Image

F

Bright

(Auto)

• High-ISO NR Auto

• Slow Shutter Speed NR On

• Shake Reduction

• Color Space k

(On) sRGB

If the 3 button is pressed in

B

mode, the menu for Green Mode appears.

You cannot select items that cannot be changed.

1

Set the mode dial to

B

.

• In

B

mode, the following functions and operations are not available.

• Changing the shutter speed

• Changing the aperture value

• EV Compensation

• Flash (Flash On, Slow-speed

Sync, Trailing Curtain Sync,

Wireless Mode, Exposure

Compensation)

• Continuous Shooting

• Focus Mode k ( l is selected)

• D-Range Setting

• Lens Correction

• Exposure Bracketing

• Mirror Lock-up Shooting

• Multi-exposure

• Interval Shooting

• Extended Bracketing

• Digital Filter

• HDR Capture

• Cross Processing

• Horizon Correction

• Saving as

A

mode

•

L

and | /

Y

button operations

• Button Customization (default settings are used)

• Custom menu settings (default settings are used)

• The control panel cannot be displayed in

B

mode.

Using the

e

Mode

Automatically sets the shutter speed and aperture value to obtain a proper exposure according to the selected Program Line when taking pictures.

You can also use the front and rear e-dials to change the shutter speed or

aperture value while maintaining the proper exposure. (p.247)

1

Set the mode dial to

e

.

4

91

92

2

Check the shutter speed and aperture value.

Check the settings using the status screen, viewfinder or LCD panel.

P

1/ 125

ISO

AUTO

100

AF.S

F

5.6

-5 4 3 2 1 1 2 3 4 +5

AWB

JPEG

16

M

[ 37 ]

Set the Program Line to use in [Program Line] of the [

A

Rec. Mode 3] menu.

(p.89)

4

Using the

K

Mode

You can set the sensitivity to suit the brightness of the subject.

The shutter speed and aperture value are automatically set according to the selected sensitivity to obtain a proper exposure.

1

Set the mode dial to

K

.

2

Turn the rear e-dial (

S

) to adjust the sensitivity.

The set values are displayed in the status screen and viewfinder and on the LCD panel.

Sv

1/ 30

ISO

100

AF.S

F

4.5

-5 4 3 2 1 1 2 3 4 +5

AWB

JPEG

16

M

[ 37 ]

4

• You can set the sensitivity to a value equivalent to ISO 100 to 12800. [ISO

AUTO] is not available.

• The sensitivity can be set in increments of 1/3 EV or 1/2 EV. Set the exposure

steps in [1. EV Steps] of the [

A

Custom Setting 1] menu. (p.106)

93

94

Using the

b

Mode

Lets you set the desired shutter speed for expressing moving subjects.

When taking pictures of a fast moving subject, you can increase the shutter speed to make the subject look still or decrease the shutter speed to have the subject show movement.

The aperture value is automatically set to give a proper exposure depending on the shutter speed.

1

Set the mode dial to

b

.

4

2

Turn the front e-dial (

R

) to adjust the shutter speed.

The shutter speed can be set within the range of 1/8000 to 30 seconds.

The set values are displayed in the status screen and viewfinder and on the LCD panel.

Tv

1/ 125

ISO

AUTO

400

AF.S

F

5.6

-5 4 3 2 1 1 2 3 4 +5

AWB

JPEG 16

M

[

37

]

• The shutter speed can be set in increments of 1/3 EV or 1/2 EV. Set the

exposure steps in [1. EV Steps] of the [

A

Custom Setting 1] menu. (p.106)

• The proper exposure may not be obtained with the selected shutter speed

when the sensitivity is not set to [ISO AUTO] (p.83).

95

Exposure Warning

If the subject is too bright or too dark, the aperture value will blink on the status screen and LCD panel and in the viewfinder. If the subject is too bright, choose a faster shutter speed. If it is too dark, choose a slower shutter speed. When the aperture value indication stops blinking, you can take a picture with proper exposure.

Use a commercially available ND (Neutral Density) Filter if the subject is too bright. Use a flash if it is too dark.

4

Using the

c

Mode

Set the aperture value for controlling the depth of field. The depth of field is deeper and the front and back of the focused object is clear when the aperture is set to a large value, small lens opening. The depth of field is shallower and the front and back of the focused object is blurred when the aperture is set to a small value, large lens opening.

The shutter speed is automatically set to the proper exposure depending on the aperture value.

1

Set the mode dial to

c

.

96

2

Turn the rear e-dial (

S

) to adjust the aperture value.

4

The set values are displayed in the status screen and viewfinder and on the LCD panel.

Av

1/ 30

ISO

AUTO

400

AF.S

F

4.5

-5 4 3 2 1 1 2 3 4 +5

AWB

JPEG

16

M

[ 37 ]

• The aperture value can be set in increments of 1/3 EV or 1/2 EV. Set the

exposure steps in [1. EV Steps] of the [

A

Custom Setting 1] menu. (p.106)

• The proper exposure may not be obtained with the selected aperture value

when the sensitivity is not set to [ISO AUTO] (p.83).

Exposure Warning

If the subject is too bright or too dark, the shutter speed will blink on the status screen and LCD panel and in the viewfinder. When the subject is too bright, set the aperture to a smaller lens opening (larger number), and when too dark, set the aperture to a larger lens opening (smaller number). Once blinking stops, you can take a picture with proper exposure.

Use a commercially available ND (Neutral Density) Filter if the subject is too bright. Use a flash if it is too dark.

Using the

L

Mode

You can set both the desired shutter speed and aperture to take the picture.

Automatically sets the sensitivity so that the manually set shutter speed and aperture value will give the proper exposure according to the brightness of the subject.

1

Set the mode dial to

L

.

97

4

2

Turn the front e-dial (

R

) to adjust the shutter speed.

The shutter speed can be set within the range of 1/8000 to 30 seconds.

3

Turn the rear e-dial (

S

) to adjust the aperture value.

98

4

The set values are displayed in the status screen and viewfinder and on the LCD panel.

TAv

1/ 1000

ISO

AUTO

100

AF.S

F

4.5

-5 4 3 2 1 1 2 3 4 +5

AWB

JPEG

16

M

[

37

]

• The shutter speed and aperture value can be set in increments of 1/3 EV or

1/2 EV. Set the exposure steps in [1. EV Steps] of the [

A

Custom Setting 1]

menu. (p.106)

• In

L

mode, the sensitivity is fixed to [ISO AUTO].

Exposure Warning

If the subject is too bright or too dark, the sensitivity will blink on the status screen and LCD panel and in the viewfinder. In such situations, change the shutter speed and aperture. When the indication stops blinking, you can take a picture with proper exposure.

Use a commercially available ND (Neutral Density) Filter if the subject is too bright. Use a flash if it is too dark.

Using the

a

Mode

You can set the shutter speed and aperture value. This mode is suitable to take pictures of your choice by combining them. This mode is convenient for taking pictures using the same combination of the shutter speed and aperture settings or taking intentionally underexposed (darker) or overexposed (brighter) photographs.

1

Set the mode dial to

a

.

2

Turn the front e-dial (

R

) to adjust the shutter speed.

The shutter speed can be set within the range of 1/8000 to 30 seconds.

3

Turn the rear e-dial (

S

) to adjust the aperture value.

The set values are displayed in the status screen and viewfinder and on the LCD panel.

M

1/ 125

ISO 100

AF.S

F

5.6

-5 4 3 2 1 1 2 3 4 +5

AWB

JPEG 16

M

[ 37 ]

4

99

100

4

While adjusting the shutter speed or aperture value, the difference from the proper exposure (EV value) is displayed in a bar graph. The proper exposure is set when

V

is in the middle of the EV bar. If it is towards -, it is underexposed. If it is towards +, it is overexposed. If the value exceeds the range of the EV bar, or if the subject is too bright or too dark, the “+” or “-” blinks.

Difference from the proper exposure

• The sensitivity cannot be set to [ISO AUTO] in a mode. If the exposure mode is changed to a

mode when the sensitivity is set to [ISO AUTO], the

sensitivity is also changed to the lowest value set in “Setting the Range of

Automatic Sensitivity Correction” (p.84).

• The shutter speed and aperture value can be set in increments of 1/3 EV or

1/2 EV. Set the exposure steps in [1. EV Steps] of the [

A

Custom Setting 1]

menu. (p.106)

• Since the bar graphs in the viewfinder and on the LCD panel display the amount of camera tilt to the left or right, the difference from the proper exposure is displayed as a number when [Electronic Level] is set to

O

(On).

Combining with

L

When the exposure is locked (p.107) by pressing the

L

button in a

mode, if the shutter speed or aperture value is changed, the combination of shutter speed and aperture value changes while the exposure value is retained.

Example:If the shutter speed is 1/125 sec. and aperture is F5.6 and these settings are locked with the

L

button, the aperture automatically changes to F11 if the shutter speed is changed to 1/30 sec. with the front e-dial (

R

).

Using the

p

Mode

This setting is useful when shooting night scenes and fireworks which require long exposures.

1

Set the mode dial to

p

.

101

B

Bulb

ISO 100

AF.S

F

5.6

-5 4 3 2 1 1 2 3 4 +5

AWB

JPEG 16

M

[

37

]

2

Press the shutter release button.

The shutter remains open as long as the shutter release button is kept pressed.

3

Take your finger off the shutter release button.

Exposure ends.

4

The following functions are not available in p mode.

- EV Compensation

- Exposure Bracketing

- Continuous Shooting

- Interval Shooting

- HDR Capture

- AE Lock

- Shake Reduction

102

4

• The aperture value can be set in increments of 1/3 EV or 1/2 EV. Set the

exposure steps in [1. EV Steps] of the [

A

Custom Setting 1] menu. (p.106)

• Use a sturdy tripod and the cable switch CS-205 (optional) or Remote Control

(optional) to prevent camera shake when using p

mode. Connect the cable

switch to the cable release terminal (p.20).

• When using the remote control, set whether to start exposure with a press and stop it with another press of the shutter release button on the remote control, or to keep the shutter open as long as the release button on the

remote control is kept pressed. Set in [19. Remote Control in Bulb] of the

[

A

Custom Setting 3] menu.

• The sensitivity cannot be set to [ISO AUTO] in p mode. If the exposure mode is changed to p

mode when the sensitivity is set to [ISO AUTO], the

sensitivity is also changed to the lowest value set in “Setting the Range of

Automatic Sensitivity Correction” (p.84).

• There is no limit on exposure time for Bulb shooting. However, we recommend the use of the AC adapter kit (optional) when shooting with a long exposure setting as the battery is being drained while the shutter

remains open. (p.52)

Using the

M

Mode

The shutter speed is locked at 1/180 second. Use this when using an external flash that does not automatically set the sync speed.

1

Set the mode dial to

M

.

X

1/ 180

ISO

100

AF.S

F

5.6

-5 4 3 2 1 1 2 3 4 +5

AWB

JPEG 16

M

[

37

]

• Turn the rear e-dial (

S

) to adjust the aperture value.

• Press the

|

button to retain the shutter speed at 1/180 second and automatically adjust the aperture value.

• The sensitivity cannot be set to [ISO AUTO] in

M

mode. If the exposure mode is changed to

M

mode when the sensitivity is set to [ISO AUTO], the

sensitivity is also changed to the lowest value set in “Setting the Range of

Automatic Sensitivity Correction” (p.84).

103

Selecting the Metering Method

Choose the part of the viewfinder to use for measuring brightness and determining exposure. The following three methods are available. The factory default setting is

L

(Multi-segment metering).

1

Turn the metering mode switch.

The set metering method is displayed in the status screen and viewfinder.

4

L

Multi-segmented Metering

The scene in the viewfinder is metered in

77 different zones. Even in backlit locations, this mode automatically determines what level of brightness is in which portion and automatically adjusts exposure.

M

Center-weighted Metering

Metering is weighted at the center of the viewfinder. Use this metering when you want to compensate for the exposure by experience, instead of leaving it to the camera. The illustration shows that sensitivity increases as the pattern height increases (center). This mode does not automatically compensate for backlit scenes.

104

N

Spot Metering

The brightness is measured only within a limited area at the center of the viewfinder. You can use this in

combination with the AE Lock (p.107)

when the subject is extremely small and the correct exposure is difficult to obtain.

Center-weighted metering mode is automatically set even if you select multisegment metering mode when using a lens other than a DA, DA L, D FA, FA J,

FA, F or A lens, or when the lens aperture ring is set to a position other than s

(Auto). (Can only be used if [27. Using Aperture Ring] (p.299) in the [

A

Custom

Setting 4] menu is set to [Permitted].)

4

Linking AE to AF Point during Multi-segment

Metering

In [6. Link AE to AF Point] of the [

A

Custom Setting 1] menu, you can link the exposure and AF point in the focusing area during multisegment metering.

1

Off Exposure is set separately from the AF point. (default setting)

2

On Exposure is set in accordance with the AF point.

Setting the Meter Operating Time

You can set the exposure metering time to [10 sec.] (default setting),

[3 sec.] or [30 sec.] in [4. Meter Operating Time] of the [

A

Custom

Setting 1] menu.

Adjusting Exposure

This allows you to deliberately overexpose (brighten) or underexpose

(darken) your picture.

The exposure steps can be selected from 1/3 EV or 1/2 EV in [1. EV Steps]

of the [

A

Custom Setting 1] menu. You can adjust the EV compensation value from -5 to +5 (EV).

1

Turn the rear e-dial (

S

) while pressing the

m

button.

The exposure is adjusted.

4

105 m

is displayed in the status screen and viewfinder and on the LCD panel during adjustment.

P

1/ 100

ISO

AUTO

800

AF.S

F

4.0

Compensation value

-5 4 3 2 1 1 2 3 4 +5

AWB

JPEG

16

M

±0EV

Press the

|

button to reset the EV compensation value to 0.0.

Press the m

button to check the compensation value after adjustment.

EV compensation is not available when the exposure mode is set to

B

(Green) or p (Bulb Exposure) mode.

• The compensation value can also be changed by pressing the m button once, taking your finger off the button and turning the rear e-dial (

S

). In this case, EV compensation is set when the m

button is pressed again or the

exposure metering timer (p.104) elapses.

• The compensation value is not canceled by turning the camera off or by switching to another exposure mode.

106

EV Compensation for

a

and

M

modes

For example, if the EV compensation value is set to +1.5 for a

(Manual Exposure) and

M

(Flash X-sync speed) modes, an underexposure of 1.5 EV is displayed on the EV bar. If you set the exposure value so that the

V

is displayed at the center of the EV bar, the image will be captured with the compensated value.

4

Changing the Exposure Steps

Set the exposure compensation steps to

increments of 1/3 EV or 1/2 EV in [1. EV

Steps] of the [

A

Custom Setting 1] menu.

1.

EV Steps

1

2

1/3 EV Steps

1/2 EV Steps

Exposure compensation steps now set to 1/3 EV

Step Interval

1/3 EV

1/2 EV

MENU Cancel OK OK

Exposure Setting Value

±0.3, ±0.7, ±1.0, ±1.3, ±1.7, ±2.0, ±2.3, ±2.7, ±3.0, ±3.3, ±3.7,

±4.0, ±4.3, ±4.7, ±5.0

±0.5, ±1.0, ±1.5, ±2.0, ±2.5, ±3.0, ±3.5, ±4.0, ±4.5, ±5.0

Changing the Exposure Automatically when Shooting

Auto Bracketing is a function for continuously shooting images with the exposure automatically adjusted for underexposure and overexposure. Each time the shutter release button is pressed, 2, 3

or 5 shots are taken. Refer to “Shooting while the Exposure is

Automatically Changed (Exposure Bracketing)” (p.138).

Locking the Exposure Before Shooting (AE Lock)

AE Lock is a function that locks the exposure prior to taking a picture. Use this when the subject is too small to obtain a proper exposure or is backlit.

1

Set the exposure and press the

L

button.

The camera locks the exposure

(brightness) at that instant.

@

is displayed in the status screen and viewfinder while the AE Lock is engaged.

107

4

• The exposure remains locked as long as the

L

button is kept pressed or the shutter release button is kept pressed halfway. The exposure remains

locked for twice the amount of the exposure metering timer (p.104) even after

taking your finger off the

L

button.

• You will hear a beep when the

L

button is pressed. The beep can be

turned off. (p.252)

• AE Lock is not available in

B

(Green), p

(Bulb Exposure) or

M

(Flash Xsync Speed) mode.

• When any of the following operations are performed, AE Lock is canceled.

- the

L

button is pressed again

- the Q button, 3 button or

M

button is pressed

- the mode dial is turned

- the lens is changed

- a lens with an s (Auto) position is set to a position other than the s position

• The combination of shutter speed and aperture value changes depending on the zooming position even while the AE Lock is engaged when using a zoom lens whose maximum aperture value varies depending on the focal length.

However, the exposure value does not change and a picture is taken at a brightness level set when the AE Lock is activated.

• The exposure can also be locked when the focus is locked. Set in [5. AE-L with AF Locked] of the [

A

Custom Setting 1] menu. (p.115)

108

Focusing

You can focus with the following methods.

=

Autofocus

The camera automatically focuses on the subject when the shutter release button is pressed halfway.

\

Manual focus

Manually adjust the focus. (p.116)

Using the Autofocus

4

You can also choose the autofocus mode from l

(Single mode) where the shutter release button is pressed halfway to focus on the subject and the focus is locked at that position, and k (Continuous mode) where the subject is kept in focus by continuous adjustment while the shutter release button is pressed halfway. The factory default setting is l

.

1

Set the focus mode switch to

l

or

A

.

109 l

Single mode

When the shutter release button is pressed halfway and the subject comes into focus, the focus is locked (focus lock) at that position. If the subject is outside the focusing area, focus the camera on the subject in the focusing area, lock the focus at that position (focus lock), and then recompose your picture.

• The AF assist light turns on as necessary. (p.109)

• Set the action priority for when the shutter release button is

pressed fully in [15. AF.S Setting] of the [

A

Custom Setting 3] menu.

1

2

Focuspriority

Releasepriority

The shutter cannot be released until the subject is in focus. (default setting)

If the subject is too close to the camera, move back and take the picture. If the subject is difficult

to focus, adjust the focus manually. (p.116)

The shutter can be released even if the subject is not in focus.

k

(

A

)

Continuous mode

The subject is kept in focus by continuous adjustment while the shutter release button is pressed halfway. The focus indicator

]

appears and you will hear a beep when the subject comes into focus. Even if the subject is not in focus, the shutter can be released when the shutter release button is pressed fully.

• When the shutter release button is pressed halfway to focus, the camera automatically tracks the subject if it is determined to be a moving object. The lens will automatically operate and continuously focus on the subject.

• Set the action priority for Continuous Shooting in [16. AF.C

Setting] of the [

A

Custom Setting 3] menu.

1

2

Focuspriority

FPSpriority

Takes pictures giving priority to keeping the subject in focus during Continuous Shooting.

(default setting)

Takes pictures giving priority to the shooting speed during Continuous Shooting.

4

AF Assist Light

You can set whether or not to use the AF assist light during l mode

in [17. AF Assist Light] of the [

A

Custom Setting 3] menu.

1

On

To make focusing easier when the subject is in a dark location, the AF assist light turns on when the shutter release button is pressed halfway. (default setting)

2

Off The AF assist light will not be used.

110

4

Using the

=

Button to Focus on the Subject

You can set the camera so that focusing is performed when the = button is pressed.

1

Select [Button Customization] in the [

A

Rec. Mode 5] menu and press the four-way controller (

5

).

The [Button Customization] screen appears.

2

Use the four-way controller (

23

) to select [AF Button] and press the four-way controller (

5

).

The [AF Button] screen appears.

3

Press the four-way controller (

5

) and use the four-way controller

(

23

) to select [Enable AF].

AF Button

Enable AF

Cancel AF

AF is performed when the AF button is pressed

MENU Cancel OK OK

Enable AF

Cancel AF

Autofocus is performed by using the = button or the shutter release button. (default setting)

\ appears in the viewfinder while the = button is pressed. Autofocus is not performed when the shutter release button is pressed. (Take your finger off the = button to return to normal autofocus mode.)

4

Press the

4

button.

5

Press the

3

button three times.

The camera is ready to take a picture.

6

Press the

=

button while looking through the viewfinder.

Autofocus is performed.

l

Single mode k

Continuous mode

When the = button is pressed and the subject comes into focus, the Focus Lock function is activated while the button is pressed.

The subject is kept in focus while the = button is pressed.

7

Press the shutter release button.

When [Enable AF] is assigned to [Shutter Button Half Press] in [Button

Customization], press the shutter release button while holding down the

= button.

The picture is taken.

4

AF Fine Adjustment

You can adjust the AF focusing position.

• Be sure to use [AF Fine Adjustment] only when necessary. Care should be taken as adjusting the autofocus may make it difficult to capture images with the appropriate focus. Set to [Off] if you do not need to adjust the AF focusing position.

• Any camera shake during test shooting may make it difficult to obtain the accurate focusing position. Therefore, always use a tripod when taking test shots.

1

Select [26. AF Fine Adjustment] in the [

A

Custom Setting

4] menu and press the four-way controller (

5

).

2

Use the four-way controller (

23

) to select [On] and press the four-way controller (

5

).

The [26. AF Fine Adjustment] screen appears.

111

112

3

Use the four-way controller (

[Apply One].

23

) to select [Apply All] or

Apply All Applies the same adjustment value to all lenses.

Apply

One

This item will appear on the display only when the lens ID is obtained. Saves and applies a different adjustment value for each lens type. (Up to 20 lens types)

Reset Resets the saved adjustment value.

4

Press the four-way controller (

5

) and adjust the value.

26. AF Fine Adjustment

Apply All

Apply One

+5

Unset

4

Reset

MENU

Cancel

±0

OK OK

Available operations

Four-way controller (

5

)/

Rear e-dial (

S

) to the right ( y )

Four-way controller (

4

)/

Rear e-dial (

S

) to the left ( f )

|

button

Adjusts the focus to a closer position.

Adjusts the focus to a farther position.

Resets the adjustment value to ±0.

5

Press the

4

button.

The adjustment value is saved.

6

Press the

3

button three times.

The camera returns to Capture mode.

7

Take a test picture.

You can easily check the focusing point by enlarging the image during

Digital Preview (p.120) or Live View (p.146).

Even when an adjustment value has been saved using [Apply One], if you press the 4 button with [Apply All] selected in Step 3, the [Apply All] value is used instead of the [Apply One] value.

113

Selecting the Focusing Area (AF Point)

Choose the part of the viewfinder to set focus to. The factory default setting is

S

(Auto).

Selected AF point(s) light red in the viewfinder (Superimpose AF Area).

U

Center j

Select

S

Auto

Sets the focusing area to the center of the viewfinder.

Sets the focusing area to the user selected point from eleven points in the AF frame.

The camera selects the optimum AF point even if the subject is not centered. You can select from 11 AF points (default setting) or 5 points in [AUTO AF Point Setting] of [AF Settings] in the [ A Rec. Mode 1] menu.

4

1

Turn the AF point switching dial.

• AF point(s) are not illuminated red in the viewfinder when [Off] is selected for

[14. Superimpose AF Area] in the [

A

Custom Setting 2] menu.

• The focusing area is fixed to

U

regardless of this setting when using lenses

other than DA, DA L, D FA, FA J, FA or F lens. (p.297)

114

Setting the Focus Position in the Viewfinder

1

Set the AF point switching dial to

j

.

V

appears in the viewfinder and the AF point can be changed.

4

2

Look through the viewfinder and check the position of the subject.

3

Use the four-way controller (

2345

) to change the AF point.

The selected AF point appears in the status screen.

P

AF.S

1/ 2000

F

2.8

ISO

AUTO

1600

-5 4 3 2 1 1 2 3 4 +5

AWB

JPEG 16

M

[

37

]

Available operations

4 button

Press and hold

4 button

Returns the AF point to the center of the AF frame.

Disables changing the AF point and enables direct key operation of the four-way controller (

2345

). To enable changing the AF point, press the 4 button while direct key operation is enabled. You will hear a beep when switching between enabled and disabled.

The AF point(s) light red in the viewfinder (Superimpose AF Area) and you can check where you set the AF point.

• The position of the changed AF point is stored even if the camera is turned off or the focusing area is switched to

U

or

S

.

•

V

appears in the viewfinder when the AF point can be changed.

• When [Expanded Area AF] is set to

O

(On) in [AF Settings] of the [

A

Rec.

Mode 1] menu, if your subject briefly moves out from the focus point that was selected when the focus mode was set to k

, the camera will continue to focus on your subject based on information from the focus points (back-up focus points) surrounding the selected focus point. The back-up focus points are displayed in pink on the status screen.

115

Locking Exposure when the Focus is Locked

Set [5. AE-L with AF Locked] in the

[

A

Custom Setting 1] menu to lock the exposure value while the focus is locked.

5.

AE-L with AF Locked

1

2

Off

On

AE is locked when the focus is locked

MENU Cancel OK OK

1

Off Exposure is not locked when the focus is locked. (default setting)

2

On Exposure is locked when the focus is locked.

4

116

Adjusting the Focus Manually (Manual Focus)

When you adjust the focus manually, you can use either the focus indicator or the matte field in the viewfinder.

4

Using the Focus Indicator

The focus indicator

]

appears in the viewfinder when the subject is in focus even during manual focus.

You can manually adjust the focus using the focus indicator ] .

1

Set the focus mode switch to

\

.

2

Look through the viewfinder, press the shutter release button halfway and turn the focusing ring.

The focus indicator

]

appears and you will hear a beep when the subject comes into focus.

• Adjust the focus manually using the matte field in the viewfinder when the subject is difficult to focus and the focus indicator does not appear.

• The beep that sounds when the image is focused can be turned off. (p.252)

Using the Viewfinder Matte Field

You can manually adjust the focus using the matte field in viewfinder.

1

Set the focus mode switch to

\

.

2

Look through the viewfinder and turn the focusing ring until the subject is clearly visible in the viewfinder.

Shooting in Catch-in Focus Mode

When [25. Catch-in Focus] in the [

A

Custom Setting 4] menu is set to

[On], if the focus mode is set to l

and one of the following types of lenses is attached, Catch-in Focus shooting is enabled and the shutter is released automatically when the subject comes into focus.

• Manual focus lens

• DA or FA lens that enables switching = and

\

modes on the lens itself (the setting on the lens must be set to

\

before shooting)

How to Take Pictures

1 Attach a proper lens to the camera.

2 Set the focus mode switch to l .

3 Set the focus on a position the subject will pass.

4 Press the shutter release button fully.

The shutter is released automatically when the subject comes into focus at the set position.

4

117

118

Checking the Composition, Exposure and Focus Before Shooting (Preview)

4

You can use the preview function to check depth of field, composition, exposure and focus before taking a picture.

There are two preview methods.

Preview Method

|

Optical Preview e

Digital Preview

Description

For checking the depth of field with the viewfinder.

For checking the composition, exposure and focus on the monitor.

You can use the Live View function that displays a real-time image on the monitor and enables you to change the shooting settings and magnify the

image. (p.146)

Selecting the Preview Method

Choose whether to use Optical Preview or Digital Preview when the main switch is turned to the preview position (

|

).

The default setting is Optical Preview.

1

Select [Button Customization] in the [

A

Rec. Mode 5] menu and press the four-way controller (

5

).

The [Button Customization] screen appears.

2

Use the four-way controller (

23

) to select [Preview Dial] and press the four-way controller (

5

).

The [Preview Dial] screen appears.

3

Press the four-way controller (

5

) and use the four-way controller

(

23

) to select [Optical Preview] or [Digital Preview].

Preview Dial

Optical Preview

Digital Preview

For checking depth of field with viewfinder

MENU Cancel OK OK

4

Press the

4

button.

5

Press the

3

button three times.

The camera is ready to take a picture.

• While shooting with Mirror Lock-up Shooting, Interval Shooting, Multiexposure or Live View, Optical Preview is used regardless of the setting.

• Digital Preview can also be assigned to the | /

Y

button. If Optical

Preview is assigned to the Preview dial and Digital Preview is assigned to the

| /

Y

button, you can use both preview functions easily. Refer to p.249

for assigning a function to the | /

Y

button.

119

Setting the Display for Digital Preview

For Digital Preview, you can set whether to display the histogram and

Bright/Dark Area warning, and whether to enable enlarging images.

1

Select [Digital Preview] in the [

A

Rec. Mode 5] menu and press the four-way controller (

5

).

The [Digital Preview] screen appears.

2

Use the four-way controller

(

23

) to select [Histogram],

[Bright/Dark Area] or [Enlarge

Instant Review].

Digital Preview

Histogram

Bright/Dark Area

Enlarge Instant Review

4

MENU

3

Use the four-way controller (

45

) to select

O

or

P

.

4

Press the

3

button twice.

120

Displaying the Optical Preview

4

1

Focus on the subject.

2

Turn the main switch to

|

while looking through the viewfinder.

You can check the depth of field in the viewfinder while the main switch is set to the position

|

.

During this time, no shooting information is displayed in the viewfinder, and the shutter cannot be released.

3

Take your finger off the main switch.

Optical Preview is ended and the camera is ready to take a picture.

Displaying the Digital Preview

1

Focus on the subject and compose the picture in the viewfinder.

2

Turn the main switch to

|

.

When Digital Preview is assigned to the

| /

Y

button, press the | /

Y button.

The icon (

|

) appears on the monitor during preview and you can check the composition, exposure and focus.

Available operations

Rear e-dial (

S

)

L

button

Enlarges the preview image. (p.211)

Saves the preview image.

3

Press the shutter release button halfway.

Digital Preview is ended and the autofocus system operates.

The maximum display time for Digital Preview is 60 seconds.

AE.L

4

121

122

Using the Shake Reduction Function to Prevent Camera Shake

Using the Shake Reduction Function

4

The Shake Reduction function reduces camera shake that occurs when the shutter release button is pressed.

Ideal when taking pictures in the following situations.

• When taking pictures in dimly lit locations, such as indoors, at night, on cloudy days and in the shade

• When taking telephoto pictures

The Shake Reduction function can be used to reduce horizontal and vertical camera shake or keep the image level.

• The Shake Reduction function does not compensate for blurring caused by subject movement. To take pictures of a moving subject, increase the shutter speed.

• The Shake Reduction function may not fully reduce camera shake when taking close-up shots. In this case, it is recommended to turn off the Shake

Reduction function and use the camera with a tripod.

• The Shake Reduction function will not fully work when shooting with a very slow shutter speed, for example when panning or shooting night scenes. In this case, it is recommended to turn off the Shake Reduction function and use the camera with a tripod.

• The Shake Reduction function is available with any PENTAX lens compatible with this camera. However, be sure to set the focal length before using a lens for which focal length information cannot be automatically obtained. Refer to

“When the Focal Length Cannot Be Automatically Detected” (p.124) for details.

Reducing Vertical and Horizontal Camera Shake

1

Select [Shake Reduction] in the [

A

Rec. Mode 4] menu and press the four-way controller (

5

).

2

Use the four-way controller (

23

) to select

k

or

l

and press the

4

button.

k

Uses Shake Reduction. (default setting) l

Does not use Shake Reduction.

1 2 3 4 5

Movie

Live View

Electronic Level

Horizon Correction

Shake Reduction

Input Focal Length

GPS

MENU Cancel

OK

OK

3

Press the

3

button.

The screen that was displayed before selecting the menu appears again.

4

Press the shutter release button halfway.

k

appears in the viewfinder and the

Shake Reduction function is activated.

123

• Set [Shake Reduction] to l

(Off) when using the camera with a tripod or when this function is not needed.

• The Shake Reduction function automatically turns off in the following situations. Note that the Shake Reduction function cannot be selected when the following functions are set.

p (Bulb Exposure) mode

- Self-timer shooting

- Remote Control shooting

- Mirror Lock-up shooting

- when [Auto Align] is set to P (Off) in the [HDR Capture] setting

- when using the flash in wireless mode

4

Correcting the Tilt of the Images

1

Select [Horizon Correction] in the [

A

Rec. Mode 4] menu.

2

Use the four-way controller

(

45

) to select

O

or

P

.

1 2 3 4 5

Movie

Live View

Electronic Level

Horizon Correction

Shake Reduction

Input Focal Length

GPS

MENU

Exit

35mm

3

Press the

3

button.

The screen that was displayed before selecting the menu appears again.

124

4

Press the shutter release button halfway.

The following indicators appear on the status screen.

k

Shake Reduction On + Horizon Correction Off l

Shake Reduction Off + Horizon Correction Off q

Shake Reduction On + Horizon Correction On r

Shake Reduction Off + Horizon Correction On

4

• The Shake Reduction function will not fully work (for about 2 seconds) right after turning on the camera or restoring from Auto Power Off. Wait for the

Shake Reduction function to become stable, and then press the shutter button gently. If k

appears in the viewfinder when you press the shutter release button halfway, the camera is ready to take a picture.

• The Shake Reduction function is available with any PENTAX lens compatible with this camera. However, when the aperture ring is set to a position other than the s (Auto) position for a lens with a s position or a lens without an s

position is used, the camera will not operate unless [27. Using Aperture Ring]

is set to [Permitted] in the [

A

Custom Setting 4] menu. Set this beforehand.

In such cases, however, some functions will be restricted. Refer to “Using the

Aperture Ring” (p.299) for details.

When the Focal Length Cannot Be Automatically Detected

The Shake Reduction function operates by obtaining the lens information such as focal length.

If the camera uses a DA, DA L, D FA, FA J, FA or F lens, the lens information is automatically obtained when the Shake Reduction function is activated.

Set the focal length if you use a lens whose information such as focal

length cannot be automatically obtained (p.297).

• The [Input Focal Length] setting screen does not appear when using a lens whose information such as focal length can be automatically obtained.

• When using a lens without the s position on the aperture or with the aperture set to a position other than s

, set [27. Using Aperture Ring] in the [

A

Custom

Setting 4] menu to [Permitted]. (p.299)

• The effect of Shake Reduction is influenced by the shooting distance as well as focal length information. The Shake Reduction function may not work as effectively as expected when shooting at close ranges.

1

Make sure that [Shake Reduction] is set to

k

(On) and turn the camera off.

Refer to “Reducing Vertical and Horizontal Camera Shake” (p.122) for

details.

2

Attach a lens and turn the camera on.

The [Input Focal Length] screen appears.

3

Turn the rear e-dial (

S

) to set the focal length.

Input Focal Length

Select from the following focal length values. (The default setting is 35 mm.)

8 10 12 15 18 20 24 28 30 35

40 45 50 55 65 70 75 85 100 120

135 150 180 200 250 300 350 400 450 500

550 600 700 800

100

MENU Cancel

120

135

OK OK

125

4

• If the focal length for your lens is not listed above, select the value closest to the actual focal length (example: [18] for 17 mm and [100] for 105 mm).

• When using a zoom lens, select the actual focal length at the zoom setting being used.

4

Press the

4

button.

The camera is ready to take a picture.

To change the focal length setting, use [Input Focal Length] in the [

A Rec.

Mode 4] menu.

Shooting with Self-timer

g

Self-timer

(12 sec.)

Z

Self-timer

(2 sec.)

Shutter is released after about 12 seconds. Use this mode to include the photographer in the picture.

A mirror pops up immediately after the shutter release button is pressed. The shutter is released after about 2 seconds. Use this mode to avoid camera shake when the shutter release button is pressed.

126

1

Mount the camera onto a tripod.

2

Press the four-way controller (

2

) in Capture mode.

The [Drive Mode] screen appears.

3

Use the four-way controller (

45

) to select

g

.

4

Press the four-way controller (

3

) and use the four-way controller

(

45

) to select

g

or

Z

.

Drive Mode

Self-timer (12 sec.)

MUP

4

MENU Cancel

5

Press the

4

button.

The camera is ready to take a picture.

6

Press the shutter release button halfway.

The autofocus system operates.

7

Press the shutter release button fully.

For g , the front and back self-timer lamps start blinking slowly and blink rapidly 2 seconds before the shutter is released.

The beep is heard and the rate increases.

The shutter will be released about 12 seconds after the shutter release button is pressed fully.

For Z , the shutter will be released about

2 seconds after the shutter release button is pressed fully.

OK OK

• Select a mode other than g or Z in the [Drive Mode] screen to cancel the

Self-timer shooting. The setting is canceled when the camera is turned off if

[Drive Mode] is set to

P

(Off) in [Memory] of the [

A

Rec. Mode 5] menu.

(p.274)

• The Shake Reduction function is automatically turned off when g

or Z is set.

• You can set the camera so that the beep does not sound. (p.252)

• The exposure may be affected if light enters the viewfinder. Use the AE Lock

function (p.107) or attach the provided ME viewfinder cap. The light entering

the viewfinder has no effect on the exposure when the exposure mode is set to a

(Manual Exposure).

127

Removing the Eyecup F

R

Attaching the ME Viewfinder cap

Shooting with Remote Control (Optional)

The shutter can be released from a distance by using the optional remote control unit.

h i i

Remote Control

Remote Control

(3s delay)

Remote

Continuous

Shooting

The shutter is released immediately after the shutter release button on the remote control unit is pressed.

The shutter is released about 3 seconds after the shutter release button on the remote control unit is pressed.

Continuous shooting starts when the shutter release button on the remote control unit is pressed. Press the shutter release button on the remote control unit again to exit continuous shooting.

1

Mount the camera onto a tripod.

2

Press the four-way controller (

2

) in Capture mode.

The [Drive Mode] screen appears.

4

128

4

3

Use the four-way controller (

45

) to select

h

.

4

Press the four-way controller (

3

) and use the four-way controller

(

45

) to select

h

,

i

, or

i

.

W

appears on the LCD panel. The selftimer lamp will blink and the camera is in a stand-by status.

Drive Mode

Remote Control

MUP

MENU Cancel OK OK

5

Press the

4

button.

The camera is ready to take a picture.

6

Press the shutter release button halfway.

The autofocus system operates.

7

Point the remote control unit towards the remote control receiver on the front or back of the camera and press the shutter release button on the remote control.

The operating distance of the remote control unit is approximately 4 m from the front of the camera and approximately 2 m from the back of the camera.

After a picture is taken, the self-timer lamp lights for 2 seconds and then returns to blinking.

Approx.

4 m

Approx.

2 m

129

• By default, you cannot adjust the focus with the remote control unit. Focus on the subject first with the camera before operating with the remote control.

When [18. AF with Remote Control] is set to [On] in the [

A

Custom Setting 3] menu, you can use the remote control unit to adjust the focus. (AF cannot be used with the remote control unit during Live View.)

• Select a mode other than h

, i

or i

in the [Drive Mode] screen to cancel the Remote Control shooting. The setting is canceled when the camera is turned off if [Drive Mode] is set to

P

(Off) in [Memory] of the [

A

Rec. Mode

5] menu. (p.274)

• The Shake Reduction function is automatically turned off when h

, i

or i is set.

• The exposure may be affected if light enters the viewfinder. Use the AE Lock

function (p.107) or attach the provided ME viewfinder cap. The light entering

the viewfinder has no effect on the exposure when the exposure mode is set to a (Manual Exposure).

4

Removing the Eyecup F

R

Attaching the

ME Viewfinder cap

• The remote control may not operate in backlit conditions.

• When using the Remote Control Waterproof O-RC1, AF can be operated with the

S

button. The { button cannot be used.

• The Remote Control F can send a remote control signal about 30,000 times.

Contact a PENTAX Service Center to replace the battery (this will involve a fee).

130

Shooting with the Mirror Lock-up Function

4

Use the Mirror Lock-up function if camera shake is evident even when the remote control or cable switch is used with a tripod.

For Mirror Lock-up Shooting, press the shutter release button to raise the mirror up and press it again to release the shutter.

d e

Mirror Up

Mirror Up +

Remote Control

Mirror Lock-up shooting with the shutter release button.

Mirror Lock-up shooting with the remote control. The shutter will be released immediately after the shutter release button on the remote control unit is pressed

(p.127).

1

Mount the camera onto a tripod.

2

Press the four-way controller (

2

) in Capture mode.

The [Drive Mode] screen appears.

3

Use the four-way controller (

45

) to select

d

.

4

Press the four-way controller (

3

) and use the four-way controller

(

45

) to select

d

or

e

.

Drive Mode

Mirror Lock-up Shooting

MUP

d

appears in the status screen and on the LCD panel.

MUP

MENU Cancel OK OK

5

Press the

4

button.

The camera is ready to take a picture.

6

Press the shutter release button halfway.

The autofocus system operates.

7

Press the shutter release button fully.

The mirror pops up and you will hear a beep. The AE Lock function is enabled with the exposure value set immediately before the mirror pops up.

8

Press the shutter release button fully again.

The shutter is released and the picture is taken.

• Select a mode other than d

or e

in the [Drive Mode] screen to cancel

Mirror Lock-up shooting. The setting is canceled when the camera is turned off if [Drive Mode] is set to

P

(Off) in [Memory] of the [

A

Rec. Mode 5] menu.

(p.274)

• The mirror automatically returns to its original position if 1 minute elapses after the mirror pops up when the shutter release button is pressed for the first time (except while using Multi-exposure).

• The Shake Reduction function is automatically turned off when d

or e is set.

• The beep that sounds when the mirror pops up can be turned off. (p.252)

131

4

132

Taking Pictures Continuously

Continuous Shooting

4

Pictures can be taken continuously while the shutter release button is kept pressed.

g

Continuous

Shooting (Hi) h

Continuous

Shooting (Lo)

For JPEG image with p

/ C , up to approx. 30 frames are taken continuously at a maximum of approx. 7.0 fps.

For JPEG image with p

/

C

, pictures are taken continuously at a maximum of approx. 1.6 fps until the SD

Memory Card is full.

When the file format is [RAW] (PEF), up to approx. 20 frames for g

and up to approx. 40 frames for h

can be taken continuously.

1

Press the four-way controller (

2

) in Capture mode.

The [Drive Mode] screen appears.

2

Use the four-way controller (

45

) to select

g

.

3

Press the four-way controller (

3

) and use the four-way controller

(

45

) to select

g

or

h

.

Drive Mode

Continuous Shooting (Hi)

MUP

MENU Cancel

4

Press the

4

button.

The camera is ready to take a picture.

5

Press the shutter release button halfway.

The autofocus system operates.

OK OK

6

Press the shutter release button fully.

Pictures are taken continuously while the shutter release button is fully pressed. Take your finger off the shutter release button to stop.

133

• If the focus mode is set to l

(Single mode), the focus position is locked in the first frame and pictures are taken continuously at the same interval.

• Focusing is continuously activated during Continuous Shooting when the focus mode is set to k (Continuous mode).

• You can also use the remote control for Continuous Shooting. (p.127)

• The shutter cannot be released until charging is complete when using the built-in flash. You can set the camera to enable shutter release before the

built-in flash is ready in [20. Release While Charging] of the [

A

Custom

Setting 3] menu. (p.71)

• Select a mode other than g

or h

in the [Drive Mode] screen to cancel the

Continuous Shooting. The setting is canceled when the camera is turned off if [Drive Mode] is set to

P

(Off) in [Memory] of the [

A

Rec. Mode 5] menu.

(p.274)

• The shooting speed may be slower when [Lens Correction] (p.193) is set to

On.

4

Interval Shooting

During Interval Shooting, pictures are taken at a set interval from a set time.

• Interval Shooting is not available in the following situations.

- when the exposure mode is set to

B

(Green), p

(Bulb Exposure),

A

, or

C

(Movie)

- when Extended Bracketing, Digital Filter or HDR Capture is set

• When Interval Shooting is set, Multi-exposure is not available.

1

Select [Interval Shooting] in the [

A

Rec. Mode 2] menu and press the four-way controller (

5

).

The [Interval Shooting] screen appears.

134

4

2

Use the four-way controller

(

23

) to select [Interval].

Interval Shooting

Start Shooting

00 00 00 "

When taking two or more pictures, set the wait time until the next picture is taken.

Use the four-way controller (

45

) to select the number of hours, minutes, and seconds, and use the four-way controller

(

23

) to set the time.

Interval

Number of Shots

Start Interval

Start Time

MENU Cancel

You can set up to 24 hours, 00 minutes, and 00 seconds.

Press the 4 button to complete the setting.

002images

Now

OK OK

3

Use the four-way controller (

Shots].

23

) to select [Number of

Set the number of shots to be taken.

Press the four-way controller (

5

) and use the four-way controller (

23

) to select the number of shots to be taken.

You can select between 1 and 999 shots.

Press the 4 button to complete the setting.

4

Use the four-way controller (

23

) to select [Start Interval].

Set the time when the first picture is taken.

Press the four-way controller (

5

) and use the four-way controller (

23

) to select [Now] or [Set Time].

Now

Set Time

Shooting starts immediately. You can take two or more pictures.

Shooting starts at the set time. Press the four-way controller

(

3

) to select [Start Time], use the four-way controller (

45

) to select the time, and use the four-way controller ( 23 ) to set the start time.

5

Use the four-way controller (

23

) to select [Start

Shooting] and press the

4

button.

The camera is ready to take a series of interval pictures.

6

Press the shutter release button halfway.

The focus during Interval Shooting is locked at this position.

7

Press the shutter release button fully.

When [Start Interval] is set to [Now], the first picture is taken. When set to [Set Time], shooting starts at the set time.

For shooting multiple pictures, pictures are taken at the interval set in

Step 2.

To cancel shooting, press the 3 button.

After the set number of pictures are taken, [Interval shooting complete] is displayed, and the camera returns to normal standby mode.

135

• If the mode dial or the main switch is turned while shooting, the pictures that have been already taken are saved and Interval Shooting is ended.

• [Single Frame Shooting] is selected regardless of the current drive mode setting.

• If the subject is not in focus with the focus mode set to l

(Single mode) or if the [Interval] setting is too short and the previous image processing cannot be completed before taking the next picture, no picture may be taken.

• Although each shot taken is displayed with Instant Review, they cannot be magnified, deleted, or saved in RAW format.

• Interval Shooting is canceled when the SD Memory Card has no more available space.

• If the Auto Power Off function turns the camera off during Interval Shooting, the camera automatically turns on again when the shooting time approaches.

• It is recommended to use the AC adapter kit (optional) when using the

Interval Shooting over a long period of time. (p.52)

4

136

Multi-exposure

You can create a composite picture by taking multiple frames.

4

• Multi-exposure is not available in the following situations.

- when the exposure mode is set to

B

(Green) or C (Movie)

- when Extended Bracketing, Digital Filter, HDR Capture or Cross

Processing is set

• When Multi-exposure is set, the following functions are not available.

- Exposure Bracketing or Interval Shooting (The function selected last is used)

- Lens Correction

1

Select [Multi-exposure] in the [

A

Rec. Mode 2] menu and press the four-way controller (

5

).

The [Multi-exposure] screen appears.

2

Use the four-way controller (

23

) to select [Number of

Shots].

3

Press the four-way controller (

5

) and use the four-way controller

(

23

) to select the number of shots.

Select from 2 to 9 shots.

Multi-exposure

Start Shooting

Number of Shots

Auto EV Adjustment

2 times

MENU Cancel OK OK

4

Press the

4

button.

5

Use the four-way controller (

23

) to select [Auto EV

Adjustment] and use the four-way controller (

45

) to select

O

or

P

.

When set to

O

(On), the exposure is adjusted automatically according to the number of shots.

6

Use the four-way controller (

23

) to select [Start

Shooting] and press the

4

button.

The camera is ready to take a picture.

7

Press the shutter release button halfway.

The autofocus system operates.

8

Press the shutter release button fully.

The composite picture is displayed in Instant Review each time the shutter release button is pressed. Press the i

button during Instant

Review to discard pictures taken up to that point and take pictures again from the first frame.

The pictures are saved when the set number of shots are taken, and then the [Multi-exposure] screen appears again.

• If any of the following operations are performed while shooting, the pictures that have been already taken are saved and Multi-exposure is ended.

- when the

Q

button, 3 button, four-way controller (

2345

),

M button or | /

Y

button is pressed

- when the mode dial is turned

• When shooting in Multi-exposure mode using Live View, a semi-transparent composite image of the pictures taken is displayed. (It is not displayed when the camera is connected to an AV device.)

137

4

138

Shooting while Adjusting the

Settings (Auto Bracketing)

4

Auto Bracketing is a function for shooting while automatically changing the camera settings. There are two Auto Bracketing modes: Exposure

Bracketing and Extended Bracketing.

You can set Auto Bracketing Order in [8. Auto Bracketing Order] in the

[

A

Custom Setting 2] menu.

1 0 - + Standard ´ Underexposed ´ Overexposed (default setting)

2 - 0 + Underexposed ´ Standard ´ Overexposed

3 + 0 -

Overexposed ´ Standard ´ Underexposed

4 0 + Standard ´ Overexposed ´ Underexposed

Shooting while the Exposure is Automatically

Changed (Exposure Bracketing)

You can take continuous pictures with different exposures when the shutter release button is pressed. You can select to take 2 images

(Standard/+), 2 images (Standard/-), 3 images or 5 images. When taking

3 pictures, the first image is exposed with no compensation, the second image is underexposed (negative compensation) and the third image is overexposed (positive compensation).

Standard exposure Underexposure Overexposure

• Exposure Bracketing is not available in the following situations.

- when the exposure mode is set to p

(Bulb Exposure)

- when HDR Capture is set

• Exposure Bracketing and Multi-exposure cannot be used at the same time.

The function selected last is used.

1

Press the four-way controller (

2

) in Capture mode.

The [Drive Mode] screen appears.

2

Use the four-way controller (

45

) to select

l

.

3

Press the four-way controller (

3

) and use the four-way controller

(

45

) to select

l

,

b

, or

c

.

Drive Mode

Exposure Bracketing

MUP

-5 4 3 2 1

3image(s)

MENU

Cancel

1 2 3 4 +5

±0.5EV

OK OK

l b c

Exposure

Bracketing

Exposure

Bracketing +

Self-timer

Exposure

Bracketing +

Remote Control

Takes pictures with the shutter release button.

Takes pictures with the self-timer. Self-timer

operates according to the self-timer (p.125)

setting.

Takes pictures with the remote control. Remote control operates according to the remote control

(p.127) setting. When set to

i

(Remote

Continuous Shooting), the shutter is released immediately.

4

Turn the front e-dial (

R

) to set the number of shots.

Select [2 images (+)], [2 images (-)], [3 image(s)] or [5 image(s)].

5

Turn the rear e-dial (

S

) to set the bracketing amount.

The following values can be set according to the step interval set in [1.

EV Steps] (p.106) in the [

A

Custom Setting 1] menu.

Step Interval

1/3 EV

1/2 EV

Bracketing Amount

±0.3, ±0.7, ±1.0, ±1.3, ±1.7, ±2.0

±0.5, ±1.0, ±1.5, ±2.0

4

139

140

4

Available operations

m button +

Rear e-dial (

S

)

Adjusts the EV compensation when taking only underexposed or overexposed images with Exposure

Bracketing. Images are taken with an EV compensation value set to 0 (intermediate value). (Up to ±8 EV)

Resets the compensation value to ±0.

|

button

6

Press the

4

button.

The camera is ready to take a picture.

7

Press the shutter release button halfway.

When the subject is in focus, the focus indicator

]

appears in the viewfinder and the EV compensation value appears on the status screen and LCD panel and in the viewfinder.

8

Press the shutter release button fully.

Continue to press the shutter release button until the set number of shots are captured.

Consecutive images will be taken according to the order set in [8. Auto

Bracketing Order] of the [

A

Custom Setting 2] menu.

• When the focus mode is set to l

(Single mode), the focus position is locked in the first image and is used for subsequent images.

• When you take your finger off the shutter release button during Exposure

Bracketing, the exposure setting will remain effective for twice the amount of

the exposure metering timer (default setting is about 20 seconds) (p.104) and

you can take a picture at the next compensation value. In this case, autofocus works for each image. After about twice the amount of the exposure metering timer elapses, the camera returns to settings for taking the first image.

• When [9. One-Push Bracketing] in the [

A

Custom Setting 2] menu is set to

[On], even if the shutter release button is not continuously pressed fully, all images are automatically shot with one press of the shutter release button.

• You can combine Exposure Bracketing with the built-in flash or an external flash (P-TTL auto only) to change only the flash output continuously.

However, when using an external flash, holding the shutter release button down to take consecutive images may cause the second and third images to be taken before the flash is fully charged. Take each image after confirming that charging is complete.

• Select a mode other than l

, b

or c

in the [Drive Mode] screen to cancel the

Exposure Bracketing. The setting is canceled when the camera is turned off if

[Drive Mode] is set to

P

(Off) in [Memory] of the [

A

Rec. Mode 5] menu. (p.274)

• If you use Exposure Bracketing frequently, you can assign it to the | /

Y

button. (p.249)

Shooting while Adjusting Other Settings

(Extended Bracketing)

You can save pictures with three different levels of White Balance,

Saturation, Hue, High/Low Key Adjustment, Contrast and Sharpness.

Unlike Exposure Bracketing, three pictures are saved each time the shutter is released.

• When Extended Bracketing is set, the file format is always set to [JPEG] and cannot be changed. You cannot use Extended Bracketing when the file format is set to [RAW] or [RAW+].

• When Extended Bracketing is set, the following functions are not available.

• Interval Shooting or Multi-exposure

• Cross Processing, Digital Filter or HDR Capture (The function selected last is used)

1

Select [Extended Bracketing] in the [

A

Rec. Mode 2] menu and press the four-way controller (

5

).

The [Extended Bracketing] screen appears.

2

Press the four-way controller (

5

).

3

Use the four-way controller (

23

) to select an item and press the

4

button.

Extended Bracketing

WB

S

Off

White Balance

Saturation

Hue

High/Low Key Adj

Contrast

Sharpness

MENU Cancel OK OK

4

Use the four-way controller (

23

) to select [Bracketing

Amount] and press the four-way controller (

5

).

4

141

142

4

5

Use the four-way controller (

23

) to select the bracketing amount and press the

4

button.

Select [±1] (default setting), [±2], [±3] or

[±4].

For [White Balance], select from [BA±1]

(default setting), [BA±2], [BA±3], [GM±1],

[GM±2] or [GM±3].

6

Press the

3

button twice.

The camera returns to Capture mode.

Extended Bracketing

Saturation

Bracketing Amount

±1

±2

±3

±4

MENU Cancel

7

Press the shutter release button halfway.

The autofocus system operates.

8

Press the shutter release button fully.

OK OK

Three images are saved.

• Exposure Bracketing and Extended Bracketing can be used at the same time. When used at the same time, each time the shutter is released for

Exposure Bracketing, three images with Extended Bracketing applied are saved.

• Parameters that cannot be set due to the image finishing tone setting of

Custom Image also cannot be set for Extended Bracketing. (Example: When set to [Monochrome], Saturation and Hue cannot be selected for Extended

Bracketing) (p.197)

• When [Fine Sharpness] or [Extra Sharpness] is set for Custom Image, the sharpness of Extended Bracketing operates as Fine Sharpness or Extra

Sharpness.

• When [Contrast] is set for Custom Image, the contrast of Extended

Bracketing operates according to the [Contrast] setting.

Taking Pictures Using Digital Filters

143

You can apply a filter when taking pictures.

The following filters can be selected.

Filter Name

Toy Camera

Retro

High Contrast

Extract Color

Soft

*1

Starburst

*1

Fish-eye

*1

For taking pictures that look as if taken with a toy camera.

Effect

For taking pictures with the look of old photos.

Parameter

Shading Level: Low/Medium/High

Blur: Low/Medium/High

Tone Break: Red/Green/Blue/Yellow

Toning (B-A): 7 levels

Frame Composite: None/Thin/

Medium/Thick

For taking pictures with high contrasts.

+1 to +5

For extracting one or two specific colors and making the rest of the image black and white.

For taking pictures with a soft focus throughout the image.

Extracted Color 1: Red/Magenta/

Blue/Cyan/Green/Yellow

Extractable Range of Color 1: +1 to +5

Extracted Color 2: OFF/Red/

Magenta/Blue/Cyan/Green/Yellow

Extractable Range of Color 2: +1 to +5

Soft Focus: Low/Medium/High

Shadow Blur: OFF/ON

Shape: Cross/Star/Snow Crystal/

Heart/Musical Note

For taking pictures of night scenes or lights reflected on water with a special sparkling look by adding extra glitter to the highlights.

Effect Density: Small/Medium/Large

Size: Small/Medium/Large

Angle: 0°/30°/45°/60°

For taking pictures that look as if taken with a fish-eye lens.

Low/Medium/High

4

144

4

Filter Name

Custom Filter

*1

You can customize and save a filter to your own preferences.

Color

*2

Effect

For taking pictures with the selected color filter.

Parameter

High Contrast: OFF/+1 to +5

Soft Focus: OFF/+1 to +3

Tone Break: OFF/Red/Green/Blue/

Yellow

Shading Type: 6 types

Shading Level: -3 to +3

Distortion Type: 3 types

Distortion Level: OFF/Low/Medium/

High

Invert Color: OFF/ON

Color: Red/Magenta/Blue/Cyan/

Green/Yellow

Color Density: Light/Standard/Dark

*1 Not available when the exposure mode is set to

C

(Movie).

*2 Available only when the exposure mode is set to

C

(Movie).

• When Digital Filter is set, the file format is always set to [JPEG] and cannot be changed. You cannot use Digital Filter when the file format is set to [RAW] or [RAW+].

• When Digital Filter is set, the following functions are not available.

- Interval Shooting, Multi-exposure, Continuous Shooting

- Extended Bracketing or HDR Capture (The function selected last is used)

Depending on the filter used, it may take longer to save images.

1

Select [Digital Filter] in the [

A

Rec. Mode 2] menu and press the four-way controller (

5

).

The screen for selecting a filter appears.

The last image taken after the camera was turned on is displayed in the background.

2

Use the four-way controller

(

45

) to select a filter.

Starburst

MENU Cancel Check

AE.L

OK OK

3

Use the four-way controller

(

23

) to select the parameter and the four-way controller (

45

) to adjust the parameter’s value.

Shape

4

MENU

Cancel Check

AE.L

OK OK

Available operations

Main switch (

|

)

L

button

Uses Digital Preview to preview the background image with the filter effect applied. (Not available when the exposure mode is set to C (Movie).)

Saves the background image.

4

Press the

4

button.

The camera returns to the [

A

Rec. Mode 2] menu.

5

Press the

3

button.

The camera is ready to take a picture.

• When the exposure mode is set to

C

(Movie), change the settings from

[Movie] in the [

A

Rec. Mode 4] menu. (p.152)

• Select [Not use any filters] in Step 2 to finish shooting with digital filter.

• JPEG and RAW images can be processed with digital filters in Playback

mode. (p.233)

145

146

Shooting with Live View

4

You can shoot a picture while displaying the real-time image on the monitor.

• The image in Live View may differ from the captured image if the brightness of the subject is low or high.

• If any changes occur in the shooting light source during Live View, the image may flicker.

• If the camera position is changed rapidly during Live View, the image may not be displayed with the appropriate brightness. Wait for the display to become stable before shooting.

• Noise may appear on the Live View image when used in dark locations.

• The higher the sensitivity, the more noise and color unevenness may occur in the Live View image and/or captured image.

• Live View can be displayed for up to 5 minutes. When Live View is ended after the elapse of 5 minutes, Live View can be restarted by pressing the

U button.

• If you continue shooting with Live View for a prolonged period, the internal temperature of the camera may increase, resulting in lower quality images. It is recommended that you turn off Live View when not shooting. To prevent the image quality from degrading, allow enough time for the camera to cool down while shooting with long exposures or recording movies.

• If the internal temperature of the camera becomes high, l

(temperature warning) is displayed and Live View may not be available. If this happens, stop shooting or use the viewfinder.

• During Live View, nothing is displayed in the viewfinder.

• Holding the camera by hand and shooting while viewing the monitor may cause camera shake. Use of a tripod is recommended.

• The field of view of the image display is nearly 100%.

• You can use the provided AV cable or a commercially available HDMI cable

to display the Live View image on a TV or monitor. (p.224)

• Live View is not displayed when data is being saved to the SD Memory Card.

Setting Live View

You can set the display and autofocus mode for Live View.

1

Select [Live View] in the [

A

Rec. Mode 4] menu and press the four-way controller (

5

).

The [Live View] screen appears.

2

Press the four-way controller (

5

) and use the four-way controller

(

23

) to select an autofocus method.

Live View

Autofocus Method

Show Grid

Info Overlay

Histogram

Bright/Dark Area

4

147

MENU

Cancel OK OK

I

Face Detection

AF i

Contrast AF

S

Phase Difference

AF

Gives autofocus priority to detected faces and performs contrast autofocus. A yellow frame appears for a main face (white frames appear for other faces), and autofocus and automatic exposure are performed for the main face. (default setting)

The face detection is not performed when the focus mode is set to

\

.

Displays Live View and performs autofocus based on the information obtained from the image sensor.

Cancels Live View and performs autofocus with the AF sensor.

If the shutter release button is pressed halfway during

Live View, the Live View image will disappear and the autofocus system operates. Once focused, the Live

View image will be displayed again.

3

Press the

4

button.

4

Use the four-way controller (

23

) to select [Show Grid] and press the four-way controller (

5

).

148

4

5

Use the four-way controller (

23

) to select a grid display type and press the

4

button.

Live View

Autofocus Method

Show Grid

Info Overlay

Histogram

Bright/Dark Area

Select from [Off] (default setting), e

(4x4 Grid), f

(Golden Section) or g

(Scale).

OK OK MENU Cancel

6

Use the four-way controller (

23

) to select [Info Overlay],

[Histogram] or [Bright/Dark Area].

7

Use the four-way controller (

45

) to select

O

or

P

.

8

Press the

3

button twice.

The screen that was displayed before selecting the menu appears again.

It takes more time to focus on the subject when using

I

or i

than when using

S

. It is also difficult for the camera to focus on the following objects (or under the following conditions).

- objects with poor contrast

- objects with no vertical contrast, such as horizontal stripes

- objects with constantly changing brightness, shape, or color, such as a water fountain

- objects whose distance from the camera changes

- small objects

- objects appearing in both the foreground and background

- when using a special filter

- objects at the edge of the screen

Taking a Still Picture

1

Select an exposure mode.

Set the mode dial to any mode other than

C

.

2

Press the

U

button.

The mirror pops up and a real-time image is displayed on the monitor. Press the

U button again to exit Live View.

Live View display

(All of the indicators are displayed here for explanatory purposes.)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

P

USER

9

10

12

11

17

-5 4 3 2 1

2000 F2.8

1 2 3 4 +5

ISO 3200

[1234]

18 19 20 21 22

13

14

15

16

1

Exposure Mode

2

Flash Mode

3

Drive Mode

4

White Balance

5

Custom Image

6

Extended Bracketing/Multiexposure/Interval Shooting/

Digital Filter/HDR Capture

7

Number of shots using Multiexposure/Cross Processing

2000 F2.8

23

ISO 400

24

[

37]

8

Battery level

9

Adjusting composition

10

Temperature warning

11

GPS positioning status

12

Electronic Level

13

Contrast AF frame

14

Phase Difference AF frame/AF point

15

EV Compensation

16

Histogram

4

149

150

4

17

AE Lock

18

Shutter speed

19

Aperture value

20

EV bar

21

Sensitivity

22

24

Remaining image storage capacity

23

Main face detection frame

(Face Detection AF)

Face detection frame (Face

Detection AF)

* Indicator 9 is displayed when switching to Live View after adjusting the

composition in [Composition Adjust.] (p.195) in the [

A

Rec. Mode 2] menu.

* Indicator 11 is displayed only when the optional GPS unit is attached to the

camera and is operating. (p.305)

* Indicator 12 is displayed when [Electronic Level] is set to

O

(On). (p.262)

* Indicator 14 (Phase Difference AF frame) is displayed in white during Live

View. When the subject is in focus, a green square frame is displayed instead. It turns red when the subject is not in focus. It is not displayed when the focus mode is set to

\

.

* When 18, 19, and 21 can be changed,

5

appears next to the set value.

* Indicators 23 and 24 are displayed when [Autofocus Method] is set to

I and the camera detects person’s face(s). When the subject is in focus, a green frame is displayed. It turns red when the subject is not in focus.

Available operations

M

|

button

button

Enlarges the image.

2, 4, or 6 times original size (when the focus mode is = )

2, 4, 6, 8 or 10 times original size (when the focus mode is

\

)

Returns the position of the display area to the center

(during enlarged view).

Press and hold 4 button *1

Switches the function of the four-way controller

(

2345

) to Change AF point or direct key operation.

4 button *1

Four-way controller

(

2345

)

Returns the position of the AF point to the center

(when Change AF point is enabled).

Changes the AF point (when Change AF point is enabled).

Moves the display area (during enlarged view).

*1 Available only when [Autofocus Method] is

I

or i

, and the focus mode is l or the AF point switching dial is set to j (Select).

3

Position the subject on the monitor and press the shutter release button halfway.

The autofocus system operates.

When the focus mode is set to

\

, turn the focusing ring until the subject is clearly visible on the focusing screen.

4

Press the shutter release button fully.

The picture is taken.

• When the focus mode is set to k and [Autofocus Method] is set to i

, the camera focuses on the center of the screen when autofocus starts and then automatically tracks the subject when it is in focus. When [Autofocus

Method] is set to

I

, the camera automatically tracks the detected face.

• Images captured in magnified display are recorded at normal size.

• You can check the depth of field on the monitor by turning the main switch to

|

during Live View.

151

The status screen and control panel cannot be displayed during Live View. To change the settings, press the 3 button and change them from each menu.

4

152

Recording Movies

You can record movies using Live View.

Changing the Movie Settings

4

You can record movies with monaural audio in AVI file format.

1

Select [Movie] in the [

A

Rec. Mode 4] menu and press the four-way controller (

5

).

The [Movie] screen appears.

2

Press the four-way controller

(

5

), use the four-way controller

(

23

) to select the number of recorded pixels, and press the

4

button.

1280x720

Recorded Pixels

Quality Level

Sound

Cross Processing

Digital Filter

Movie Aperture Control

Shake Reduction

MENU Cancel

00:31'55"

FullHD

25

HD

30

HD

25

VGA

30

VGA

25

Fixed

OK OK

Recorded Pixels a b

(default setting) b c c

Pixels

1920×1080

1280×720

1280×720

640×480

640×480

Aspect Ratio

16:9

16:9

16:9

4:3

4:3

Frame Rate

25 fps

30 fps

25 fps

30 fps

25 fps

3

Use the four-way controller (

23

) to select [Quality Level] and press the four-way controller (

5

).

4

Use the four-way controller (

23

) to select the quality level and press the

4

button.

Select from

C

(Best; default setting),

D

(Better) and

E

(Good).

When the recorded pixels and quality level are changed, the amount of recordable time at that setting appears at the top right of the screen.

5

Use the four-way controller (

23

) to select [Sound] and press the four-way controller (

5

).

6

Use the four-way controller (

23

) to select

g

or

Z

and press the

4

button.

g

Records sound. (default setting)

Z

Does not record sound.

7

Set Cross Processing and Digital Filter as necessary.

Refer to p.200 for details on Cross Processing and p.143 for Digital Filter.

8

Use the four-way controller (

23

) to select [Movie

Aperture Control] and press the four-way controller (

5

).

9

Use the four-way controller (

23

) to select the [Fixed] or

[Auto] and press the

4

button.

4

153

Fixed

The movie is recorded at the aperture value set before movie recording starts. (default setting)

The aperture is controlled automatically.

Auto

10

Use the four-way controller (

23

) to select [Shake

Reduction] and press the

5

button.

11

Use the four-way controller (

23

) to select

k

or

l

and press the

4

button.

k Uses Shake Reduction.

l Does not use Shake Reduction. (default setting)

12

Press the

3

button twice.

The camera is ready to record a movie.

154

Connecting a Microphone

You can connect a commercially available stereo microphone to the microphone terminal on the camera and record stereo sound. Using an external microphone can also help to reduce the possibility of recording camera operation sounds.

4

The following specifications are recommended for external microphones.

• Plug: Stereo mini plug (ø3.5 mm)

• Format:

• Power:

• Impedance:

Stereo electret condenser

Plug-in Power Method (operating voltage of 2.0 V or lower)

2.2 k

Ω

1

Turn off the camera.

2

Open the microphone terminal cover and connect the plug of the microphone to the microphone terminal on the camera.

3

Turn the camera on.

If the external microphone is disconnected during recording, the camera cannot switch to the internal microphone until recording has stopped. No sound will be recorded.

If you used an external microphone to record movie sound in stereo, the sound can be played back in stereo when you use a commercially available HDMI cable to output the movie to an HDMI-compatible AV device. If you use an AV

cable to output the movie, monaural sound is played back. (p.224)

Recording Movies

1

Set the mode dial to

C

.

Live View for movie recording is displayed.

Sound

F2.8

00:30'00"

Recordable Time

Shake Reduction

Available operations

Rear e-dial (

S

) Changes the aperture value when [Movie Aperture

Control] is set to [Fixed]. (default setting)

|

button Sets the aperture value to obtain a proper exposure.

(default setting)

Returns the position of the display area to the center

(during enlarged view).

Performs EV compensation (up to ±2 EV).

m

button +

Rear e-dial (

S

)

M

button Enlarges the image.

2, 4, or 6 times original size (when the focus mode is

=

)

2, 4, 6, 8 or 10 times original size (when the focus mode is

\

)

Press and hold 4 button

*1

4

button

*1

Switches the function of the four-way controller

(

2345

) to Change AF point or direct key operation.

Returns the position of the AF point to the center

(when Change AF point is enabled).

4

155

156

4

Four-way controller

(

2345

)

Changes the AF point (when Change AF point is enabled).

Moves the display area (during enlarged view).

*1 Available only when [Autofocus Method] is

I

or i

, and the focus mode is l or the AF point switching dial is set to j

(Select).

2

Position the subject on the monitor and press the shutter release button halfway.

The autofocus system operates.

When the focus mode is set to

\

, turn the focusing ring until the subject is clearly visible on the focusing screen.

3

Press the shutter release button fully.

Recording of the movie starts.

4

Press the shutter release button again.

Recording stops.

• When [Sound] is set to g

(On), the camera operation sounds are also recorded. When recording a movie, mount the camera onto a tripod and do not operate the camera while recording.

• While recording a movie, the autofocus system does not operate.

• The flash is not available.

• When recording movies using image processing, such as Digital Filter, some frames may be dropped from the recorded movie.

• If the internal temperature of the camera becomes high during movie recording, the recording may be terminated to protect the camera circuitry.

• You can record movies continuously up to 4 GB or 25 minutes. When the SD

Memory Card is full, recording stops and the movie is saved.

• The Live View image in

C

mode is displayed according to the [Live View] settings made in the [ A

Rec. Mode 4] menu. (p.147) However, the Bright/

Dark Area warning is not displayed during movie recording.

• You can set the functions for when the front/rear e-dial or the

|

button is

operated. (p.247)

• If you intend to shoot continuously for a long period, use of the AC adapter

kit (optional) is recommended. (p.52)

• You can also use the optional remote control to record a movie. (p.127)

• The sensitivity is fixed to [ISO AUTO].

• If you want to view a movie on an external monitor while recording it, connect

the camera to an AV device with a mini HDMI terminal. (p.226) You cannot

output a movie using the PC/AV terminal while recording.

Playing Back Movies

Recorded movies can be played back in Playback mode in the same manner as saved still pictures.

1

Press the

Q

button.

The camera switches to Playback mode.

2

Use the four-way controller ( play back.

45

) to choose a movie to

The first frame of the movie is displayed on the monitor.

3

Press the four-way controller

(

2

).

Movie playback starts.

4

157

Available operations

Movie 10min00sec

Four-way controller (

2

) Pauses/Resumes playback.

Rear e-dial (

S

) Volume control (6 levels)

Four-way controller (

5

) Forwards a frame (during pause).

Press and hold four-way controller (

5

)

Press and hold four-way controller (

4

)

Fast-forwards playback while pressed.

Four-way controller (

4

) Reverses playback./

Reverses a frame (during pause).

Fast-reverses playback while pressed.

Four-way controller (

3

) Stops playback./

Displays the playback mode palette (when stopped). (p.208)

L

button Saves the displayed image in JPEG format (during pause).

When the movie ends, playback stops and the first frame is displayed again.

• You can use the provided AV cable or a commercially available HDMI cable

to play back the recorded movies on a TV screen or other AV devices. (p.224)

• Even if you used an external microphone to record movie sound in stereo, monaural sound is played back when you output the movie via the PC/AV terminal. When you output the movie via the mini HDMI terminal, sound is played back in stereo.

158

4

Capturing a Still Picture from a Movie

You can capture a single frame from a movie and save it as a JPEG still picture.

1

Press the four-way controller (

2

)

in Step 3 on p.157 to pause the

movie, and display the frame to save as a still picture.

Frame number/Total number of frames

AE-L

While paused, you can forward or reverse the movie in one-frame increments using the four-way controller

(

45

).

The frame number and total number of frames appear at the top right of the screen.

2

Press the

L

button.

Movie 10min00sec

The save confirmation screen appears.

3

Use the four-way controller ( press the

4

button.

23

) to select [Save as] and

The captured image is saved as a new image.

Editing Movies

Movies can be divided and unwanted segments can be deleted.

1

Press the

Q

button.

The camera switches to Playback mode.

2

Use the four-way controller ( play back.

45

) to choose a movie to

The first frame of the movie is displayed on the monitor.

3

Press the four-way controller (

3

).

The playback mode palette appears.

4

Use the four-way controller (

2345

) to select

[

(Movie

Editing) and press the

4

button.

The movie editing screen appears.

5

Select point(s) where you want to divide the movie.

The first frame at the dividing point is displayed at the top of the screen.

Up to four points can be selected (divided into five segments).

00 min

00 sec

10 min

00 sec

MENU Exit OK OK

Available operations

Four-way controller (

2

)

Four-way controller ( 5 )

Four-way controller (

4

)

Rear e-dial (

S

)

|

button

Plays back/Pauses a movie.

Moves forward 1 second (during pause).

Moves to the next dividing point (during playback).

Moves backward 1 second (during pause).

Moves to the previous dividing point (during playback).

Volume control (6 levels)

Confirms/cancels a dividing point.

Proceed to Step 9 if you do not want to delete any segment.

4

159

160

4

6

Press the

i

button.

The screen to select the segment(s) to delete is displayed.

7

Use the four-way controller (

45

) to move the selection frame and press the

4

button.

The segment(s) to delete are specified.

Multiple segments can be deleted at once.

Press the 4 button again to cancel the selection.

00 min

02 sec

10 min

00 sec

Select segments for deletion

MENU

OK

8

Press the

3

button.

The screen that was displayed in Step 5 appears again.

9

Press the

4

button.

The save confirmation screen appears.

10

Use the four-way controller (

23

) to select [Save as] and press the

4

button.

The movie is divided at the specified points and the unwanted segments are deleted from it. The divided movie is then saved as separate files and the single image display reappears.

• Select dividing points in chronological order from the beginning of the movie.

When canceling the selected dividing points, cancel each of them in reverse order (from the end of the movie to the beginning). In an order other than specified, you can neither select frames as a dividing point nor cancel the selections of the dividing points. You cannot, for example, select the frames prior to the last selected frame as a dividing point while selecting a dividing point.

• Movies with a short recording time cannot be divided.

5

Using the Flash

This chapter provides details on the built-in flash of this camera and describes how to take pictures with the external flash.

Using the Built-in Flash .....................................162

Using an External Flash (Optional) ...................167

162

Using the Built-in Flash

Flash Characteristics in Each Exposure Mode

Using the Flash in

b

Mode

• Any desired shutter speed of 1/180 sec. or slower can be set for taking a flash photograph.

• The shutter speed is locked at 1/180 sec. when a lens other than a DA,

DA L, D FA, FA J, FA, F or A lens is used.

5

Using the Flash in

c

Mode

• The shutter speed shifts automatically anywhere from 1/180 sec. to a slow shutter speed that reduces camera shake. The slowest shutter speed depends on the focal length of the lens in use.

• The shutter speed is locked at 1/180 sec. when a lens other than a DA,

DA L, D FA, FA J, FA or F lens is used.

Using the Slow-speed Sync

You can use slow-speed-sync in b

(Shutter Priority Automatic Exposure) mode when shooting portraits with the sunset in the background. Both the portrait and the background are captured beautifully.

• Slow-speed Sync slows the shutter speed. Use the Shake Reduction function or turn off the Shake Reduction function and use a tripod to avoid camera shake. The picture will also blur if the subject moves.

• Slow-speed Sync shooting can also be performed with an external flash.

Using

e

/

K

/

c

Mode

1

Set the mode dial to

e

,

K

or

c

.

2

Press the

E

button.

The built-in flash pops up.

3

Press the four-way controller (

3

).

The [Flash Mode] screen appears.

4

Select

G

or

H

and press the

4

button.

The shutter speed is set slower to give a proper exposure for the background.

Using

b

/

L

/

a

Mode

1

Set the mode dial to

b

,

L

or

a

.

2

Press the four-way controller (

3

).

The [Flash Mode] screen appears.

3

Select

E

or

F

and press the

4

button.

4

Set the shutter speed (for

b

mode) or shutter speed and aperture value (for

L

or

a

mode).

Set so a proper exposure is obtained at a shutter speed of 1/180 second or slower.

5

Press the

E

button.

The built-in flash pops up.

5

163

164

Using the Trailing Curtain Sync

Trailing Curtain Sync discharges the flash immediately before the shutter curtain closes. When shooting moving objects with a slow shutter speed,

Trailing Curtain Sync and Slow-speed Sync produce different effects depending on when the flash is discharged.

For example, when shooting a moving car with Trailing Curtain Sync, trailing light is captured while the shutter is open and the flash captures the car immediately before the shutter is closed. Therefore, the picture will include a sharp, well-lit car with trailing light behind it.

5

Slow-speed Sync

(Leading Curtain Sync)

Trailing Curtain Sync

1

Set the mode dial to any mode other than

B

,

M

or

C

.

2

Press the four-way controller (

3

).

The [Flash Mode] screen appears.

3

Select

I

or

k

and press the

4

button.

4

Press the

E

button.

The built-in flash pops up.

Trailing Curtain Sync slows the shutter speed. Use the Shake Reduction function or turn off the Shake Reduction function and use a tripod to avoid camera shake.

165

Distance and Aperture when Using the Built-in Flash

Relationships between the guide number, aperture and distance must be considered when shooting with the flash to obtain a correct exposure.

Calculate and adjust the shooting conditions if the flash output is not sufficient.

Sensitivity Built-in Flash Guide Number Sensitivity Built-in flash guide number

ISO 100 Approx. 13 ISO 3200 Approx. 73.5

ISO 200 Approx. 18.4

ISO 6400 Approx. 104

ISO 400

ISO 800

ISO 1600

Approx. 26

Approx. 36.8

Approx. 52

ISO 12800

ISO 25600

ISO 51200

*1

*1

Approx. 147

Approx. 208

Approx. 294

*1 This can be used when [3. Expanded Sensitivity] in the [

A

Custom Setting 1] menu is set to [On].

Calculating Shooting Distance from Aperture Value

The following equation calculates the effective distance of the flash.

Maximum flash distance L1 = Guide number ÷ Aperture value

Minimum flash distance L2 = Maximum flash distance ÷ 5 *

* The value 5 used in the formula above is a fixed value which applies only when using the built-in flash alone.

Example: When the sensitivity is ISO 100 and the aperture value is F2.8

L1 = 13 ÷ 2.8 = approx. 4.6 (m)

L2 = 4.6 ÷ 5 = approx. 0.9 (m)

Therefore, the flash can be used in a range of about 0.9 m to 4.6 m.

However, the built-in flash in this camera cannot be used when the distance is 0.7 m or less. When the flash is used at closer than 0.7 m, it causes vignetting in the picture corners, light is distributed unevenly and a picture may be overexposed.

5

Calculating Aperture Value from Shooting Distance

The following equation calculates the aperture value for shooting distances.

Aperture value F = Guide number ÷ Shooting distance

Example: When the sensitivity is ISO 100 and shooting distance is 4 m, the aperture value is:

F = 13 ÷ 4 = 3.25

If the resulting number (3.25, in the above example) is not available as a lens aperture, the smaller number that is closest (2.8, in the above example) is generally used.

166

Lens Compatibility with the Built-in Flash

5

Depending on the lens used with this camera, the use of the built-in flash may not be available or may be limited due to vignetting.

The built-in flash cannot be regulated and fully discharges when A lenses not set to the s

(Auto) position, lenses manufactured prior to the A lenses or soft focus lenses are used.

DA, DA L, D FA, FA J, and FA lenses not listed below can be used without problems.

* The following lenses were evaluated without a hood.

Unavailable due to vignetting

Lens Name

DA FISH-EYE 10-17mm F3.5-4.5ED (IF)

DA12-24mm F4ED AL

DA14mm F2.8ED (IF)

FA

E

300mm F2.8ED (IF)

FA

E

600mm F4ED (IF)

FA

E

250-600mm F5.6ED (IF)

Available with some restrictions

Lens Name

F FISH-EYE 17-28mm F3.5-4.5

DA16-45mm F4ED AL

DA

E

16-50mm F2.8ED AL (IF) SDM

DA17-70mm F4AL (IF) SDM

DA18-250mm F3.5-6.3ED AL (IF)

FA

E

28-70mm F2.8AL

Restrictions

Vignetting may occur if the focal length is less than 20 mm.

When the focal length is less than 28 mm or when the focal length is 28 mm and the shooting distance is 1 m or less, vignetting may occur.

When the focal length is 20 mm or less or when the focal length is 35 mm and the shooting distance is less than 1.5 m, vignetting may occur.

When the focal length is less than 24 mm or when the focal length is 24 mm and the shooting distance is 1 m or less, vignetting may occur.

Vignetting may occur if the focal length is less than 35 mm.

Vignetting may occur if the focal length is

28 mm and the shooting distance is less than

1 m.

FA SOFT 28mm F2.8/

FA SOFT 85mm F2.8

Built-in flash always discharges fully.

Using an External Flash (Optional)

167

Using an optional external flash AF540FGZ, AF360FGZ, AF200FG or

AF160FC enables a variety of flash modes such as P-TTL auto flash mode.

( z

: Available #: Restricted

×

: Not available)

Slow-speed Sync

Flash exposure compensation

AF assist light of external flash

Trailing Curtain Sync

Contrast-control-sync flash mode

Slave flash

High-speed flash sync

Wireless flash

*2

Flash

Camera Function

Red-eye reduction flash

Auto flash discharge

After the flash is charged, the camera automatically switches to the flash sync speed.

Aperture value is automatically set in e mode and b

mode.

P-TTL auto flash (appropriate sensitivity:

ISO 100 to 3200)

Built-in

Flash z z z z z z z

×

*1

z

#

*3

×

×

#

*4

AF540FGZ

AF360FGZ z z z z

z

*1

z z z z z z z

z

*5

AF200FG

AF160FC z z z z

z

z z

×

×

#

*4

×

×

×

*1

*1 Available only when using a DA, DA L, D FA, FA J, FA, F or A lens.

*2 Shutter speed of 1/90 sec. or slower.

*3 When combined with the AF540FGZ or AF360FGZ, 1/3 of the flash discharge can be output by the built-in flash and 2/3 can be output by the external flash.

*4 Available only when combined with the AF540FGZ or AF360FGZ.

*5 Multiple AF540FGZ or AF360FGZ units, or a combination of an AF540FGZ or AF360FGZ unit and the built-in flash is required.

5

• Flashes with reversed polarity (the center contact on the hot shoe is minus) cannot be used due to the risk of damaging the camera and flash.

• Do not combine with accessories that have a different number of contacts, such as a Hot Shoe Grip, as a malfunction may occur.

• Combining with flashes from other manufacturers may cause equipment breakdown. We recommend using the AF540FGZ, AF360FGZ or AF200FG.

168

5

About the Display Panel for AF360FGZ

The AF360FGZ itself does not have the function to set the FORMAT size to [DIGITAL]. However, when it is used with a SLR Digital Camera, the difference in focal length between a 35 mm camera and this camera is automatically calculated based on the difference in angle of view and is displayed on the panel (when using DA, DA L, D FA, FA J, FA or F lens).

The conversion indicator appears and the FORMAT size indicator disappears when the exposure metering timer of this camera is on (it returns to 35 mm format display when the exposure metering timer is turned off).

85mm

/77mm

50mm 35mm

28mm

/24mm

20mm 18mm Lens Focal Length

Exposure metering timer

Off

Exposure metering timer

On

85mm 70mm 50mm 35mm 28mm 24mm *

58mm 48mm 34mm 24mm 19mm 16mm *

* Using wide-angle panel

Using the P-TTL Auto Flash

You can use the P-TTL auto flash with an AF540FGZ, AF360FGZ,

AF200FG or AF160FC flash unit.

The flash pre-flashes before the actual flash and confirms the subject (the distance, brightness, contrast, whether it is backlit, etc.) using the camera 77segment metering sensor. The flash output for the actual flash is adjusted based on the information obtained from the pre-flash, enabling flash photography with more accurate exposure for the subject than with normal TTL auto.

1

Remove the cover of the hot shoe and attach the external flash.

2

Turn on the camera and the external flash.

3

Set the external flash mode to [P-TTL].

4

Confirm that the external flash is fully charged and then take a picture.

The b

will light in the viewfinder when the flash is ready (fully charged).

• For details such as operation method and effective distance, please refer to the external flash manual.

• The flash does not discharge if the subject is bright enough when the flash mode is

C

or i

. Therefore, it may not be suitable for Daylight-Sync shooting.

• Never press the

E

button when any external flash unit is attached to the camera. The built-in flash will hit the external flash. If you want to use both at once, set the wireless mode or connect them using the extension cord.

(p.173)

169

Using High-Speed Flash Sync Mode

With the AF540FGZ or AF360FGZ, you can discharge the flash to take a picture at a shutter speed faster than 1/180 second.

1

Remove the cover of the hot shoe and attach the external flash.

2

Set the exposure mode to

e

,

b

,

L

or

a

.

Select an exposure mode which allows you to set the shutter speed.

3

Turn on the camera and the external flash.

4

Set the external flash sync mode to HS

b

(High-speed flash sync).

5

Confirm that the external flash is fully charged and then take a picture.

The b

will light in the viewfinder when the flash is ready (fully charged).

5

• High-speed flash sync is available only when the shutter speed is set faster than 1/180 sec.

• High-speed flash sync is not available when the exposure mode is set to p

(Bulb Exposure).

• High-speed sync is not available with the built-in flash.

170

Using Flash in Wireless Mode

By using two external flashes (AF540FGZ or AF360FGZ) or using the built-in flash with one or more external flashes, you can shoot in P-TTL flash mode without connecting the flash units with a cord.

• Set the power switch of the external flash to WIRELESS.

• Two or more AF540FGZ/AF360FGZ external flashes are required to use high-speed flash sync in wireless mode. This function cannot be used in combination with the built-in flash.

• Set the wireless mode of the external flashes not directly connected to the camera to SLAVE.

5

Setting the Channel for the External Flash

First, set the channel for the external flash unit.

1

Set the channel for the external flash unit.

2

Remove the cover of the hot shoe and attach the external flash.

3

Turn on the camera and the external flash, and press the shutter release button halfway.

The built-in flash is set to the same channel as the external flash unit.

Be sure to set all the flashes to the same channel. Refer to the manual of the

AF540FGZ or AF360FGZ for details on how to set the channel on the external flash.

Wireless Shooting Using a Combination of the Built-in

Flash and an External Flash Unit

Set the camera to wireless flash mode when using an external flash in combination with the built-in flash.

1

Remove the external flash unit after the channel is set on the camera, and place it at the desired location.

2

Press the four-way controller (

3

).

The [Flash Mode] screen appears.

3

Select

r

and press the

4

button.

Flash Mode

Wireless Mode

The camera is ready to take a picture.

The channel for the built-in flash is displayed in the viewfinder and on the

LCD panel. The factory default setting is

CH1.

4

Press the

E

button.

MENU Cancel

0.0

OK OK

5

Confirm that both flashes are fully charged, and then take a picture.

5

171

• r

cannot be set when the exposure mode is set to

B

(Green).

• When the drive mode is set to i (Remote Control (3s delay)), d

(Mirror

Lock-up) or e

(Mirror Lock-up + Remote Control), or the lens aperture is not set to the s

position, r

cannot be selected.

172

Changing the Built-in Flash Discharge Method

You can change the built-in flash discharge method used in wireless mode.

Set in [21. Flash in Wireless Mode] of the [

A

Custom Setting 3] menu.

1

2

On Discharges the built-in flash as a master. (default setting)

Off Discharges the built-in flash as a control flash.

HS b (High-speed flash sync) is not available with the built-in flash.

5

Wireless Shooting Using a Combination of External

Flash Units

1

Set the wireless mode of the external flash directly connected to the camera to [MASTER] or [CONTROL].

MASTER

CONTROL

Discharges both the flash directly connected to the camera and the wireless flash unit as the main flash.

Discharges the flash directly connected to the camera as a control flash only, not as the main flash.

2

On the wireless remote flash unit, set the wireless flash mode to [SLAVE] and set the channel to the same channel as the flash directly connected to the camera. Then, place it at the desired location.

3

Confirm that both flashes are fully charged and then take a picture.

• The Shake Reduction function is automatically turned off in wireless mode.

• When using multiple AF540FGZ/AF360FGZ external flashes and performing high-speed flash sync shooting in wireless mode, set the flash directly connected to the camera to high-speed flash sync mode.

• When the wireless mode of the external flash directly connected to the

camera is set to [MASTER] or [21. Flash in Wireless Mode] (p.172) is set to

[On] for the built-in flash, all the flashes will discharge simultaneously.

Connecting an External Flash with an

Extension Cord

When using an external flash away from the camera, attach the Hot Shoe

Adapter F

G

( 1 ; optional) to the camera hot shoe and an Off-Camera Shoe

Adapter F ( 2 ; optional) to the bottom of the external flash, and then connect these with the Extension Cord F5P ( 3 ; optional). The Off-

Camera Shoe Adapter F can be mounted to your tripod using the tripod screw.

When combining with the built-in flash

173

2

1

5

3

Multiple Flash Shooting Using Extension Cords

You can combine two or more external flashes (AF540FGZ, AF360FGZ or

AF200FG) or you can use two or more external flashes in combination with the built-in flash.

For connecting the AF540FGZ flash unit, you can use the extension cord connection terminal on the flash. For connecting the AF360FGZ or

AF200FG flash unit, as shown in the following illustration, connect an external flash and the Hot Shoe Adapter F (

4

; optional) to the Off-Camera

Shoe Adapter F ( 2 ; optional) and then connect another Off-Camera Shoe

Adapter F ( 2 ) with another external flash using the Extension Cord F5P

( 3 ; optional).

Refer to the manual of the flash for details.

174

When combining two or more external flashes

2 4

3 3

2

1

When using multiple external flashes or using an external flash with the built-in flash, P-TTL is used for flash control.

5

Contrast-Control-Sync Flash

Combining two or more external flashes (AF540FGZ, AF360FGZ or

AF200FG) or using an external flash in combination with the built-in flash allows multiple flash photography (contrast-control-sync flash photography). This is based on the difference between the amounts of light discharged from multiple units.

The AF200FG must be combined with the AF540FGZ or AF360FGZ.

1

Connect the external flash to the camera indirectly.

Refer to p.173 for details.

2

Set the sync mode for the external flash to contrastcontrol-sync mode.

3

Confirm that both the external flash and built-in flash are fully charged and then take a picture.

• When using two or more external flashes and the contrast-control-sync mode is set on the external master flash unit, the flash output ratio is 2 (master unit)

: 1 (slave units). When an external flash is used in combination with the builtin flash, the flash output ratio is 2 (external flash) : 1 (built-in flash).

• When using multiple external flashes or using an external flash with the builtin flash, P-TTL is used for flash control.

175

X-sync Socket

You can connect an external flash to the camera with a sync cord by using the X-sync socket.

Remove the Sync socket 2P cap and connect a sync cord to the X-sync socket.

5

• The use of high-voltage or high-current external flashes may cause a camera breakdown.

• Flashes with reversed polarity (the center of the sync plug is minus) cannot be used due to the risk of damaging the camera and flash.

• When a sync cord is connected to the X-sync socket, linked functions will not work.

• To prevent vignetting caused from Trailing Curtain Sync, it is recommended to take a test shot using a shutter speed one level slower than the flash sync speed.

• The contact of the X-sync socket is not dust-proof and water-resistant. Attach the provided Sync socket 2P cap when not in use.

176

Memo

6

Shooting Settings

This chapter describes how to set the save format for pictures taken and other settings.

Setting a File Format ..........................................178

Setting the White Balance .................................183

Correcting Images ..............................................190

Setting the Image Finishing Tone .....................197

Storing Frequently Used Settings ....................202

178

Setting a File Format

Setting the JPEG Recorded Pixels

6

You can select the number of recorded pixels from p

,

J

,

P

and i

.

The default setting is p

.

Recorded Pixels p

J

P i

Pixels

4928×3264

3936×2624

3072×2048

1728×1152

1

Select [JPEG Recorded Pixels] in the [

A

Rec. Mode 1] menu and press the four-way controller (

5

).

2

Use the four-way controller (

23

) to select the number of recorded pixels and press the

4

button.

When the number of recorded pixels is changed, the number of pixels appears at the top left of the screen and the number of recordable images for that setting appears at the top right of the screen.

3

Press the

3

button.

The camera is ready to take a picture.

4928x3264

File Format

JPEG Recorded Pixels

JPEG Quality

AF Settings

Lens Correction

120

JPEG

16

M

10

M

6

M

2

M

MENU Cancel

OK

OK

Setting the JPEG Quality Level

You can set the image quality level (compression ratio). The default setting is

C

(Best).

Z

Premium

C

Best

D

Better

E Good

Images will be clearer but file size will be larger.

Images will be grainier but file size will be smaller.

1

Select [JPEG Quality] in the [

A

Rec. Mode 1] menu and press the four-way controller (

5

).

2

Use the four-way controller (

23

) to select a quality level and press the

4

button.

When the quality level is changed, the number of recordable images at that quality level appears at the top right of the screen.

3

Press the

3

button.

The camera is ready to take a picture.

File Format

JPEG Recorded Pixels

JPEG Quality

AF Settings

Lens Correction

120

JPEG

16

M

MENU

Cancel

OK

OK

6

179

180

Setting a File Format

You can set the format of image files.

JPEG

RAW

RAW+

Captures images in JPEG format. (default setting)

You can change the number of recorded pixels in [JPEG Recorded

Pixels] and the image quality level in [JPEG Quality].

RAW format is a CMOS sensor output format saved without processing.

Effects of White Balance, Custom Image and Color Space are not applied to the captured images, but they are saved as actual original information. When you perform the development process by using the

[RAW Development] function (p.238), you can create JPEG images

with these effects.

Images are saved in both RAW and JPEG formats.

When [One Push File Format] is assigned to the | /

Y

button, you can press the | /

Y

button to temporarily change the file format and

save an image in both file formats. (p.181)

6 When Extended Bracketing, Digital Filter, HDR Capture or Cross Processing is set, the file format is set to [JPEG] and cannot be changed. To change the file format, turn these functions off.

1

Select [File Format] in the [

A

Rec. Mode 1] menu and press the four-way controller (

5

).

2

Use the four-way controller (

23

) to select a file format.

When the file format is changed, the number of recordable images appears at the top right of the screen.

120

File Format

JPEG Recorded Pixels

JPEG Quality

AF Settings

Lens Correction

RAW

RAW+

MENU Cancel

OK

OK

3

Press the

4

button.

4

Press the

3

button.

The camera is ready to take a picture.

Setting the RAW File Format

You can select PEF or DNG format in [RAW

File Format] of the [

A Rec. Mode 3] menu when capturing images in RAW format.

1 2 3 4 5

D-Range Setting

ISO AUTO Setting

High-ISO NR

Slow Shutter Speed NR

Program Line

Color Space

RAW File Format

ISO

NR

AUTO

NR

AUTO

DNG

MENU Cancel OK OK

PEF

PENTAX’s original RAW file format (default setting)

DNG

General-purpose, publicly available RAW file format designed by

Adobe Systems

181

Temporarily Changing the File Format using the

|

/

Y

Button

When [One Push File Format] is assigned to the | /

Y

button, you can temporarily change the file format.

1

Select [Button Customization] in the [

A

Rec. Mode 5] menu and press the four-way controller (

5

).

The [Button Customization] screen appears.

2

Use the four-way controller (

23

) to select [

|

/

Y

Button] and press the four-way controller (

5

).

The [ | /

Y

Button] screen appears.

3

Press the four-way controller (

5

).

4

Use the four-way controller (

23

) to select [One Push File Format] and press the

4

button.

RAW/Fx Button

RAW

GPS

One Push File Format

Exposure Bracketing

Digital Preview

Electronic Level

Composition Adjust.

GPS

MENU

Cancel

OK

OK

6

182

5

Use the four-way controller (

23

) to select [Cancel after 1 shot] and use the four-way controller (

45

) to select

O

or

P

.

6

O

P

The recording format returns to the original file format after a picture is taken. (default setting)

The setting is canceled when the following operations are performed.

- the | /

Y

button is pressed again

- the

Q

button or 3 button is pressed

- the main switch is turned off

- the mode dial is turned

6

Use the four-way controller (

23

) to choose a file format.

The left side is the [File Format] setting and the right side is the file format when the | /

Y

button is pressed.

7

Press the four-way controller

(

5

), and use the four-way controller (

23

) to select a file format when the

|

/

Y

button is pressed.

RAW/Fx Button

RAW

One Push File Format

Cancel after 1 shot

JPEG

RAW

RAW+

RAW+

RAW+

RAW+

MENU Cancel OK OK

8

Press the

4

button.

9

Press the

3

button three times.

The screen that was displayed before selecting the menu appears again.

Setting the White Balance

183

Adjusts the color of an image based on ambient light conditions so that white objects appear white.

Item

F

Auto

Setting

Automatically adjusts the white balance.

(default setting)

Color Temperature

*1

Approx. 4,000 to

8,000K

G

Daylight For use when taking pictures in sunlight.

Approx. 5,200K

H

Shade

For use when taking pictures in the shade.

It reduces the bluish color tones in a picture.

Approx. 8,000K

^

Cloudy

J

For use when taking pictures on cloudy days. Approx. 6,000K

Fluorescent

Light

For use when taking pictures under fluorescent lighting. Select the type of fluorescent light.

D

Fluorescent Light Daylight Color

N

Fluorescent Light Daylight White

W

Fluorescent Light Cool White

L

Fluorescent Light Warm White

Approx. 6,500K

Approx. 5,000K

Approx. 4,200K

Approx. 3,000K

I

L

CTE

K

Tungsten

Light

Flash

*2

Manual 1-3

For use when taking pictures under light bulbs or other tungsten light. It reduces the reddish color tones in a picture.

For use when taking pictures using the built-in flash.

Use this to keep and strengthen the color tone of the light source in the image.

Use this to manually adjust the white balance according to the lighting when taking pictures. You can save three settings.

Approx. 2,850K

Approx. 5,400K

-

-

K

Color

Temperature

1~3

Use figures to set the color temperature.

You can save three settings.

-

*1 The color temperatures (K) shown above are all estimates. These do not indicate precise colors.

*2 CTE = Color Temperature Enhancement

White balance is fixed to

F

when the exposure mode is set to

B

(Green), or when Cross Processing is set.

6

184

6

1

Press the four-way controller (

4

) in Capture mode.

The [White Balance] screen appears.

The last image taken after the camera was turned on is displayed in the background.

2

Use the four-way controller ( to select the white balance.

23

)

When

J

is selected, press the four-way controller (

5

) and use the four-way controller (

23

) to select

D

,

N

,

W

, or

L

.

Proceed to Step 6 if you do not need to change the parameters.

Available operations

CTE

1

K1

MENU Cancel

White Balance

Auto

Check

AE.L

OK OK

Main switch ( | )

L

button

Uses Digital Preview to preview the background image with the setting applied. (Not available during Live View.)

Saves the background image. (Not available during

Live View.)

3

Press the four-way controller (

5

).

The fine-tuning screen appears.

4

Fine-tune the white balance.

Shade

G1 ±0

±0

MENU Cancel Check OK OK

Available operations

Four-way controller ( 23 ) Adjusts the tone of the colors between green

(G) and magenta (M).

Four-way controller ( 45 ) Adjusts the tone of the colors between blue (B) and amber (A).

|

button Resets the adjustment value.

5

Press the

4

button.

The screen that was displayed in Step 2 appears again.

6

Press the

4

button.

The camera is ready to take a picture.

• The camera automatically performs fine-tuning even when the light source is

specified. The color temperature of the light source is fixed when [10. WB

Adjustable Range] is set to [Fixed] in the [

A

Custom Setting 2] menu.

• Because the light source changes when a flash discharges, you can set the white balance for when the flash discharges. Select [Auto White Balance],

[Unchanged] or [Flash] in [11. WB When Using Flash] of the [

A

Custom

Setting 2] menu.

185

Adjusting the White Balance Manually

You can adjust the white balance depending on the light source when taking pictures. Up to three settings can be saved.

1

Select

K

in Step 2 on p.184 and press the four-way

controller (

5

).

2

Use the four-way controller

(

23

) to select

K

1 to

K

3 and press the four-way controller

(

5

).

White Balance

Manual 1

CTE

1

K1

1

2

3

MENU Cancel Check

AE.L

OK OK

3

Under the light to measure the white balance, fully display a white sheet of paper in the viewfinder or select a white area as the subject.

Manual

White Balance

SHUTTER Adjust

±0 ±0

±0

MENU Cancel

AE.L

OK OK Check

6

186

4

Press the shutter release button fully.

Set the focus mode to \ when the shutter cannot be released.

The screen to select the measuring range is displayed.

5

Use the rear e-dial (

S

) to select the entire screen or spot area for the measuring range.

6

MENU

Cancel OK OK

6

When a spot area is selected, use the four-way controller

(

2345

) to move the frame to the position you want to measure.

7

Press the

4

button.

The white balance is measured, and the screen that was displayed in

Step 3 appears again.

Adjust the white balance as necessary.

The message [The operation could not be completed correctly] appears when measuring is unsuccessful. Press the 4 button to remeasure the white balance.

8

Press the

4

button twice.

The camera is ready to take a picture.

• If a picture is extremely overexposed or underexposed, the white balance may not be adjusted. In this case, adjust exposure to the correct amount level before adjusting the white balance.

• When the mode dial is set to

C

(Movie), the white balance cannot be measured. Adjust the white balance in any exposure mode other than

C before recording a movie.

Saving the White Balance Settings of a Captured Image

You can copy the white balance settings of a captured image and save it as Manual White Balance.

Only the white balance settings of still pictures captured with this camera can be copied. The following images cannot be selected.

- Multi-exposure image

- Index image

- Still pictures captured from a movie

1

In Playback mode, display the image with the white balance settings you want to copy.

2

Press the four-way controller (

3

).

The playback mode palette appears.

3

Use the four-way controller (

2345

) to select

K

(Save as Manual WB) and press the

4

button.

The save confirmation screen appears.

You can turn the front e-dial (

R

) to select a different image.

4

Use the four-way controller (

23

) to select a number and press the

4

button.

The white balance settings of the selected image is saved to Manual White

Balance and the camera switches to

Capture mode. The white balance setting is

K

(Manual).

Save as Manual 1

Save as Manual 2

Save as Manual 3

MENU Cancel OK OK

6

187

188

Adjusting the White Balance with Color

Temperature

6

Use figures to set the color temperature. Up to three settings can be saved.

1

Select K in Step 2 on p.184 and press the four-way

controller (

5

).

2

Use the four-way controller (

23

) to select K1 to K3 and press the four-way controller (

5

).

The [Color Temperature] screen appears.

3

Adjust the color temperature with the front or rear e-dial.

You can set the color temperature value within the range from 2500K to 10000K.

Color

Temperature

5000K

±0 ±0

K1

±0

MENU

Cancel Check

OK

OK

Color temperature steps vary depending on the e-dial.

E-dial

Front (

R

)

Rear (

S

)

Kelvin

1 Step (100K)

10 Steps (1,000K)

Mired

*1

1 Step (20M)

5 Steps (100M)

*1 The default setting for Color Temperature step units is [Kelvin]. You can change the

step units to [Mired] in [13. Color Temperature Steps] of the [

A

Custom Setting 2] menu. However, figures are converted to Kelvin and displayed.

4

Press the

4

button.

The camera returns to the [White Balance] screen.

5

Press the

4

button.

The camera is ready to take a picture.

189

Setting the Color Space

You can select a color space to use.

sRGB Sets to sRGB color space. (default setting)

AdobeRGB Sets to AdobeRGB color space.

Set in [Color Space] of the [

A Rec. Mode 3] menu.

1 2 3 4 5

D-Range Setting

ISO AUTO Setting

High-ISO NR

Slow Shutter Speed NR

Program Line

Color Space

RAW File Format

ISO

NR

AUTO

NR

AUTO sRGB

MENU Cancel OK OK

The file naming system changes depending on the color space setting as shown below.

For sRGB: IMGPxxxx.JPG

For AdobeRGB: _IGPxxxx.JPG

“xxxx” indicates the file number. This is displayed as a four-digit sequential

number. (p.264)

6

190

Correcting Images

The camera and lens properties can be automatically adjusted for when taking pictures.

Adjusting Brightness

Adjusts the brightness and reduces the occurrence of overexposed and underexposed areas.

6

D-Range Setting

Expands the dynamic range and enables a more ample gradation expression by the CMOS sensor and reduces the occurrence of overexposed and underexposed areas.

1

Select [D-Range Setting] in the [

A

Rec. Mode 3] menu and press the four-way controller (

5

).

The [D-Range Setting] screen appears.

2

Use the four-way controller (

23

) to select [Highlight

Correction] and press the four-way controller (

5

).

3

Use the four-way controller (

23

) to select [Off] or [On] and press the

4

button.

D-Range Setting

Highlight Correction

Shadow Correction

Available sensitivity range is currently ISO 100-12800

MENU Cancel

4

Use the four-way controller (

23

) to select [Shadow

Correction] and press the four-way controller (

5

).

OK OK

5

Use the four-way controller (

23

) to select [Off], [Low], [Medium] or

[High] and press the

4

button.

D-Range Setting

Highlight Correction

Shadow Correction

MENU Cancel OK OK

6

Press the

3

button twice.

The camera is ready to take a picture.

When [Highlight Correction] is set to [On], the minimum sensitivity is set to ISO

200. When [3. Expanded Sensitivity] is set to [On] in the [

A

Custom Setting 1] menu, the minimum sensitivity is set to ISO 160.

HDR Capture

Enables capturing images with high dynamic range. Takes three images

(-3 EV underexposed, standard (proper exposure) and +3 EV overexposed) to create a single composite image with them.

• HDR Capture is not available in the following situations.

- when the file format is set to [RAW] or [RAW+] (fixed to [JPEG])

- when the exposure mode is set to p (Bulb Exposure) or

M

(Flash X-sync

Speed)

• When HDR Capture is set, the following functions are not available.

- Flash discharge

- Drive modes other than 9 (Single Frame Shooting), g (Self-timer (12 sec.)), Z (Self-timer (2 sec.)), h

(Remote Control) or i

(Remote Control

(3s delay))

- Interval Shooting or Multi-exposure

- Extended Bracketing, Digital Filter or Cross Processing (The function selected last is used.)

• During HDR Capture, multiple images are combined together to create a single image, so it will take time to save an image.

1

Select [HDR Capture] in the [

A

Rec. Mode 2] menu and press the four-way controller (

5

).

The [HDR Capture] screen appears.

6

191

192

2

Press the four-way controller (

5

) and use the four-way controller

(

23

) to select [Off], [Auto],

[Standard], [Strong 1], [Strong 2] or [Strong 3].

HDR Capture

HDR Capture

Auto Align

MENU Cancel OK OK

3

Press the

4

button.

4

Use the four-way controller (

23

) to select [Auto Align] and use the four-way controller (

45

) to select

P

or

O

.

6

P

O

[Shake Reduction] is fixed to l

(Off). Use a tripod to prevent camera shake when taking pictures. (default setting)

The Shake Reduction function operates according to the Shake

Reduction setting at that point. HDR Capture can be used without a tripod.

[Program Line] (p.89) is fixed to

l

(Hi-speed Priority) and [AUTO

ISO Parameters] (p.84) is fixed to

a

(Fast).

5

Press the

3

button twice.

The camera is ready to take a picture.

• During HDR Capture, pressing the 3 button while an image is being saved cancels the process and saves the image as a standard image.

• When both [Shake Reduction] and [Auto Align] are set to on, be careful of the following points.

- Make sure to hold the camera firmly so that the composition of the picture does not change while the three images are taken. If there is a great difference of the composition between three images, [Auto Align] may not be possible.

- Images taken with HDR Capture are susceptible to camera shake and blur.

Be sure to set a higher shutter speed and a higher ISO sensitivity.

- When the exposure mode is set to e (Program Automatic Exposure),

[Program Line] is set to l

(Hi-speed Priority).

- When the ISO sensitivity is set to [ISO AUTO], the sensitivity can be raised more easily than normal.

- [Auto Align] may not be possible for lenses that have a focal length exceeding 100 mm.

- When the entire subject is checkered or has a uniform surface, [Auto Align] may not be possible.

Lens Correction

Reduces distortions and lateral chromatic aberrations occurring due to lens properties.

Distortion

Distortion is the phenomenon in which the center of the image appears inflated (barrel distortion) or the center of the image appears pinched

(pincushion distortion). Distortion occurs more easily when using a zoom lens or a small diameter lens, and straight walls or the horizon in the image appear curved.

193

Pincushion distortion Barrel distortion

Lateral chromatic aberration

Lateral chromatic aberration is the phenomenon in which the magnification of the image varies according to the colors (wavelengths of light) when a picture was taken, and may cause a blurred image.

Lateral chromatic aberration occurs more easily at shorter focal lengths.

6

194

6

• Corrections can only be made when using DA, DA L, D FA or some FA lenses. [Lens Correction] cannot be selected when an incompatible lens is

attached. (p.297)

• The Lens Correction function is disabled when using an accessory such as a close-up ring or rear converter that is attached between the camera and the lens.

• When the Lens Correction function is activated, it may take longer to display

Instant Review and the shooting speed for continuous shooting may be slower.

• The effect of the Lens Correction function may be barely noticeable in some cases due to the shooting conditions or other factors.

1

Select [Lens Correction] in the [

A

Rec. Mode 1] menu and press the four-way controller (

5

).

The [Lens Correction] screen appears.

2

Use the four-way controller (

23

) to select [Distortion

Correction] or [Lat-Chromatic-Ab Adj].

3

Press the four-way controller (

5

) and use the four-way controller

(

23

) to select [OFF] or [ON].

Lens Correction

Distortion Correction

Lat-Chromatic-Ab Adj

MENU

Cancel

OK

OK

4

Press the

4

button.

5

Press the

3

button twice.

The camera is ready to take a picture.

When a compatible lens is attached and the file format is set to [RAW] or

[RAW+], the correction information is saved as a RAW file parameter and you

can select [On] or [Off] when developing the RAW images. (p.238)

Adjusting the Composition

Adjusts the Shake Reduction unit in the X-Y direction or rotation direction for a better composition position and a more level camera. Use this when you want to adjust the composition, such as when using a tripod.

1

Select [Composition Adjust.] in the [

A

Rec. Mode 2] menu and press the four-way controller (

5

).

The [Composition Adjust.] screen appears.

2

Select [Start Adjustment] and press the

4

button.

Composition Adjust.

Start Adjustment

Recall Previous Position

To start adjusting the composition from the previous position, use the four-way controller ( 23 ) to select [Recall

Previous Position] and use the four-way controller ( 45 ) to switch to O .

Live View is displayed and the composition can be adjusted.

3

Adjust the composition.

The amount of compensation (the number of steps) is displayed at the top right of the screen.

Please note: depending on the lens, adjusting the composition may cause vignetting

MENU OK OK

6

195

MENU Cancel OK OK

Available operations

Four-way controller

( 2345 )

Rear e-dial (

S

)

|

button

Moves the composition up, down, left or right.

Adjust up to 24 steps (approximately ±1.5 mm) on the image sensor.

Adjusts the level of the composition when the amount of adjustment is less than 16 steps (±1.0 mm) up or down, or to the left or right. Up to 8 steps (approximately ±1°) can be adjusted.

Resets the adjustment value.

196

4

Press the

4

button.

The camera returns to normal Live View and is ready to take a picture.

• Shake Reduction and Horizon Correction are not available.

• The saved adjustment value is reset when Live View is ended.

• When using the composition adjustment function frequently, you can assign the function to the | /

Y

button. (p.249)

6

Setting the Image Finishing Tone

Take pictures with settings to suit for your creative photographic vision.

Setting Custom Image

Select the desired picture style from the following modes and enjoy taking pictures with a creative finishing tone.

Image Tone

Bright

Natural

Portrait

Landscape

Vibrant

Muted

Bleach Bypass

Reversal Film

Monochrome

Image

Saturation, hue and contrast are set relatively high to create a bright sharp image. (default setting)

Creates a natural look that is close to the actual color.

Reproduces a healthy and bright skin tone.

Increases color saturation, highlights shapes, and produces a vivid color image.

Changes the color slightly to create an antique look.

Reduces the saturation to create a soft look.

Reduces the saturation and increases the contrast to create the look of an old picture.

Creates a picture with strong image contrast as if taken with reversal film.

Takes pictures using a monochrome color filter.

6

Image finishing tone is fixed to [Bright] and the parameters cannot be changed in the following conditions.

- when the exposure mode is set to

B

(Green)

- when Cross Processing is set

1

Press the four-way controller (

5

) in Capture mode.

The screen to select a custom image appears.

The last image taken after the camera was turned on is displayed in the background.

197

198

2

Use the four-way controller (

45

) to select an image finishing tone.

6

3

Use the four-way controller (

23

) to choose a parameter you want to change.

MENU Cancel

AE.L

Check OK OK

MENU

Cancel

AE.L

Check OK OK

The following parameters can be changed according to the selected image finishing tone.

Image Tone Parameter

Bright/

Natural/

Portrait/

Landscape/

Vibrant

Muted/

Bleach

Bypass

Saturation: -4 to +4

Hue: -4 to +4

High/Low Key Adj: -4 to +4

Contrast: -4 to +4

Sharpness: -4 to +4

Saturation: -4 to +4

Toning: Off/Green/Yellow/Orange/Red/Magenta/Purple/

Blue/Cyan

High/Low Key Adj: -4 to +4

Contrast: -4 to +4

Sharpness: -4 to +4

Reversal Film Sharpness: -4 to +4

Image Tone

Monochrome

Parameter

Filter Effect: None/Green/Yellow/Orange/Red/Magenta/

Blue/Cyan/Infrared Filter

Toning: Off/Green/Yellow/Orange/Red/Magenta/Purple/

Blue/Cyan

High/Low Key Adj: -4 to +4

Contrast: -4 to +4

Sharpness: -4 to +4

4

Use the four-way controller (

45

) to change the setting.

The background image changes according to the settings.

You can visually check the saturation and hue with the radar chart.

Available operations

Front e-dial (

R

)

Rear e-dial (

S

)

|

button

Main switch (

|

)

L

button

Switches between enabling and disabling contrast settings.

Switches between [Sharpness], [Fine Sharpness] and [Extra Sharpness]. When set to [Fine

Sharpness] or [Extra Sharpness], image outlines can be captured with more detail.

Resets the set value.

Uses Digital Preview to preview the background image with the setting applied. (Not available during

Live View.)

Saves the background image. (Not available during

Live View.)

5

Press the

4

button.

The camera is ready to take a picture.

199

6

200

Setting Cross Processing

Cross processing is the procedure of deliberately processing a film in the wrong type of chemicals to create an image with different colors and contrast. This camera features digital cross processing, which is done internally.

6

• When Cross Processing is set, the file format is fixed to [JPEG] and cannot be changed. You cannot use Cross Processing when the file format is set to

[RAW] or [RAW+].

• When Cross Processing is set, the following functions and operation are not available.

- Multi-exposure

- Extended Bracketing or HDR Capture (The function selected last is used.)

- Changing the settings of White Balance and Custom Image

1

Select [Cross Processing] in the [

A

Rec. Mode 2] menu and press the four-way controller (

5

).

When the exposure mode is set to

C

(Movie), select from [Movie] in the

[

A

Rec. Mode 4] menu. (p.152)

The [Cross Processing] screen appears.

2

Press the four-way controller (

5

) and use the four-way controller

(

23

) to select an item and press the

4

button.

Cross Processing

Cross Processing

Save Settings

Select from [Off], [Random], [Preset 1-3] and [Favorite 1-3].

MENU Cancel OK OK

3

Press the

3

button twice.

The camera is ready to take a picture.

Saving the Cross Processing Setting of a Captured Image

The outcome of cross processing varies each time a picture is taken. If you are able to take a cross processed image that you like, you can save the

Cross Processing settings used in that image. A total of 3 Cross

Processing settings can be saved for still pictures and movies.

To save Cross Processing setting for movies, set from [Movie] in the [

A

Rec.

Mode 4] menu with the mode dial set to

C

(Movie).

1

Select [Save Settings] in Step 2 on p.200 and press the

four-way controller (

5

).

The camera will search for cross processed images starting from the most recent image taken. (An hourglass icon is displayed while searching.) When a cross processed image is found, the screen to save the settings appears.

If there are no cross processed images, the message [No cross processed image] appears.

2

Turn the front e-dial (

R

) to select a cross processed image.

6

201

Save as Favorite 1

Save as Favorite 2

Save as Favorite 3

MENU

Cancel OK OK

3

Use the four-way controller (

23

) to select a number and press the

4

button.

The setting of the selected image is saved to [Favorite 1 - 3].

4

Press the

3

button twice to finish saving.

202

Storing Frequently Used Settings

6

You can save the current camera settings in the

A

mode and easily retrieve them.

The following settings can be stored.

• Exposure Mode (other than

B

and

C

) • Slow Shutter Speed NR

• Drive Mode • D-Range Setting

• Flash Mode/Flash Exposure Compensation • HDR Capture

• White Balance

• Sensitivity/ISO AUTO Setting

• Custom Image

• Cross Processing

• EV compensation value

• Program Line

• Extended Bracketing

• JPEG Recorded Pixels

• Digital Filter

• Shake Reduction/

Horizon Correction

• JPEG Quality

• File Format

• Lens Correction

• Color Space

• E-Dial Programming/

Button Customization

• RAW File Format

• AF Settings

• High-ISO NR

• [

A

Custom Setting 1-4] menu settings

The

A

mode cannot be set when the mode dial is set to

B

(Green) or

C

(Movie) mode.

Saving the Settings

Saves the settings as

A

mode. Up to five different settings can be saved.

1

Make the necessary settings.

2

Select [Save USER Mode] in the [

A

Rec. Mode 5] menu and press the four-way controller (

5

).

The [Save USER Mode] screen appears.

3

Press the four-way controller

(

5

).

Save USER Mode

Save Settings

Rename USER Mode

Check Saved Settings

Reset USER Mode

4

Use the four-way controller

(

23

) to select [

A

1] to [

A

5] and press the four-way controller

(

5

).

Save Settings

USER1

USER1

USER2

USER2

USER3

USER3

USER4

USER4

USER5

USER5

MENU

5

Press the four-way controller (

2

) to select [Save] and press the

4

button.

The settings are saved and the screen that was displayed in Step 3 appears again.

MENU

USER1

Save Settings

Saves current settings in

USER1 custom mode

Save

Cancel

MENU OK OK

6

Editing a Setting Name

You can change the name of the

A

mode in which you saved settings.

1

Select [Rename USER Mode] in Step 3 of “Saving the

Settings” and press the four-way controller (

5

).

The [Rename USER Mode] screen appears.

2

Use the four-way controller (

23

) to select [

A

1] to

[

A

5] and press the four-way controller (

5

).

The text-entry screen appears.

203

204

3

Enter the text.

Up to 18 single-byte alphanumeric characters and symbols can be entered.

Text selection cursor

Text input cursor

USER1 Rename USER Mode

Finish

USER1

Delete One Character

MENU Cancel OK Enter

6

Available operations

Four-way controller

( 2345 )

Rear e-dial (

S

)

|

button

4 button i button

Moves the text selection cursor.

Moves the text input cursor.

Switches between upper and lower case letters.

Enters a character selected with the text selection cursor at the position of the text input cursor.

Deletes a character at the position of the text input cursor.

4

After entering the text, move the text selection cursor to

[Finish] and press the

4

button.

The name is changed.

Repeat Steps 2 to 4 to change the names of other

A

modes.

5

Press the

3

button.

The camera returns to the [Save USER Mode] screen.

Checking the Saved USER Settings

1

Select [Check Saved Settings] in Step 3 of p.203 and press

the four-way controller (

5

).

The [Check Saved Settings] screen appears.

2

Use the four-way controller (

23

) to select [

A

1] to

[

A

5] and press the four-way controller (

5

).

The current settings saved in the selected

A

mode are displayed.

USER1

USER1

P

2.0x5

ISO

AUTO

AWB

200-800

G1 A1

-0.5

+1.0

WB

ISO

NR

AUTO

NR

ON

BA ±1

JPEG

16

M

MENU

AdobeRGB

± 0

± 0

± 0

± 0

± 0

± 0

± 0

OK OK

3

Press the

4

button.

The camera returns to the [Save USER Mode] screen.

205

Using Saved USER Settings

You can easily retrieve saved settings.

1

Set the mode dial to

A

.

The

A

mode guide appears.

2

Use the four-way controller

(

45

) or the rear e-dial (

S

) to select [

A

1] to [

A

5].

Use the four-way controller (

23

) to check the saved settings.

The saved settings are retrieved.

USER1

P

USER1

RAW

AF

RAW

Cancel AF

10/10/2012

P

10:30AM

Tv

Av

3

Change the settings as necessary.

The exposure mode can be changed in

[Exposure Mode] of the [

A

Rec. Mode 1] menu.

1 2 3 4

P

USER Mode

Exposure Mode

File Format

JPEG Recorded Pixels

JPEG Quality

AF Settings

Lens Correction

Av

TAv

M

B

X

MENU

Cancel

OK

OK

6

206

• The

A

mode guide appears for 30 seconds regardless of the [Guide

Display] setting in the [

R

Set-up 1] menu.

• [

A

1] to [

A

5] can also be selected from [USER Mode] in the [

A

Rec. Mode

1] menu.

ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQR

• [USER Mode] and [Exposure Mode] are displayed in the [

A

Rec. Mode 1] menu only when the mode dial is set to

A

.

• The settings changed in Step 3 are not saved as

A

mode settings. When the camera is turned off, settings return to the original saved settings.

USER Mode

Exposure Mode

File Format

JPEG Recorded Pixels

JPEG Quality

AF Settings

Lens Correction

MENU

Cancel

USER3

USER4

USER5

OK

OK

Resetting to Default Settings

6

Resets the settings saved in

A

1 to

A

5 to the default settings.

1

Select [Reset USER Mode] in Step 3 of p.203 and press the

four-way controller (

5

).

The [Reset USER Mode] screen appears.

2

Use the four-way controller (

23

) to select [

A

1] to

[

A

5] and press the four-way controller (

5

).

3

Press the four-way controller (

2

) to select [Reset] and press the

4

button.

The

A

mode settings return to the default values.

USER1

Reset USER Mode

Resets USER1 custom mode to default settings and name

Reset

Cancel

MENU OK OK

7

Playback Functions

This chapter describes how to use the various playback functions in Playback mode.

Playback Functions Operation ..........................208

Setting the Playback Display Method ...............210

Enlarging Images ...............................................211

Displaying Multiple Images ...............................212

Rotating Images .................................................219

Deleting Multiple Images ...................................220

Connecting the Camera to an AV Device .........224

208

Playback Functions Operation

Make settings related to playing back images in the playback mode palette or [

Q

Playback] menu.

Refer to “Using the Menus” (p.42) for details on how to use the menus.

Playback Mode Palette Setting Items

Press the four-way controller (

3

) in

Playback mode to display the playback mode palette.

You can display the playback mode palette even when a movie is paused.

Image Rotation

Rotates captured images.

Useful for image playback on

TV and other display devices

MENU

Exit

OK

OK

7

Item s

Image Rotation

D n o

Z u

K

Save as Manual WB

*1

h

Digital Filter

Resize

*1

Cropping

Protect

Slideshow

*2

*1

*1

*1

RAW Development p

Index

*1

*3

Rotates images.

Function

Changes the color tone of images, or adds softening and slimming effects.

Changes the number of recorded pixels and quality level of the captured image and saves it as a new file.

Cuts out only the desired area of the picture and saves it as a new image.

Protects images from being accidentally erased.

Page

p.219

p.233

p.230

p.231

p.222

Plays back the images one after another. p.218

You can copy the white balance settings of a captured image and save it as

Manual White Balance.

p.187

Converts RAW images to JPEG or TIFF format.

Joins a number of images together and creates a new image with them.

p.238

p.215

[ r

U

Movie Editing

DPOF

Item

*1 *2

*4

Save Destination

*5

Function

Divides a movie and deletes unwanted segments.

Sets the number of prints and whether to print the date on images saved on the

SD Memory Card.

Saves the GPS location information stored in the image as the destination for

Simple Navigation.

Page

p.159

p.271

p.306

*1 This cannot be performed when a movie is displayed.

*2 This cannot be performed when a RAW image is displayed.

*3 This can be performed only when RAW images are saved.

*4 This can be performed only when a movie is displayed.

*5 This can be performed only when an image with the GPS location information is saved.

209

Playback Menu Setting Items

You can perform the following settings in the [

Q

Playback] menu.

Press the 3 button in Playback mode to display the [

Q

Playback 1] menu.

Menu

Q

1

Item

Slideshow

Quick Zoom

Bright/Dark Area

Auto Image Rotation

Delete All Images

Function

Plays back the images one after another.

You can set how images will be displayed in the slideshow.

Page

p.217

Sets the initial magnification when enlarging images.

Sets whether or not to display the Bright/

Dark Area warning during playback.

p.210

Sets whether to rotate images shot with the camera held vertically when playing back.

You can delete all saved images at once. p.222

7

210

Setting the Playback Display Method

7

You can set the initial magnification when enlarging images, whether to display the Bright/Dark Area warning, and whether to automatically rotate images that are shot with the camera held vertically in Playback mode.

1

Select [Quick Zoom] in the [

Q

Playback 1] menu and press the four-way controller (

5

).

2

Use the four-way controller (

23

) to select the magnification and press the

4

button.

Select from [Off] (default setting), [×2],

[×4], [×8], [×16] or [×32].

1

Slideshow

Quick Zoom

Bright/Dark Area

Auto Image Rotation

Delete All Images

Off x2 x4 x8 x16 x32

OK

OK

MENU

Cancel

3

Use the four-way controller (

23

) to select [Bright/Dark

Area] and use the four-way controller (

45

) to select

O

or

P

.

4

Use the four-way controller (

23

) to select [Auto Image

Rotation] and use the four-way controller (

45

) to select

O

or

P

.

O

During playback, the image is automatically rotated based on the

rotation information when [23. Saving Rotation Info] in the [

A

Custom

Setting 3] menu is set to [On] or image rotation information is saved

in [Image Rotation] (p.219). (default setting)

P

The image is not automatically rotated during playback.

5

Press the

3

button.

The screen that was displayed before selecting the menu appears again.

The Bright/Dark Area warning is not displayed in Detailed information display and RGB histogram display.

Enlarging Images

Images can be magnified up to 32 times in Playback mode.

1

Use the four-way controller (

45

) to select an image in

Playback mode.

2

Turn the rear e-dial (

S

) to the right (toward

y

).

The image enlarges at each click (1.2 times to 32 times).

211

Available operations

Rear e-dial (

S

) to the right ( y

)

/ m

button

Rear e-dial (

S

) to the left ( f

)

/

|

button

Four-way controller (

2345

)

4

button

Front e-dial (

R

)

M

button

Enlarges the image (up to 32 times).

Reduces the image (up to 1.2 times).

Changes the area to display.

Returns to the original size.

Retains the magnification and the position of the magnified area and shows the previous/next image.

Switches information display on/off.

• The default setting for the first click (minimum magnification) is 1.2 times. You

can change this in [Quick Zoom] of the [

Q

Playback 1] menu. (p.210)

• The initial full display of vertical images is displayed with a magnification of

0.675 times that of horizontal images, therefore, magnification at the first click starts at 1.0 times.

7

212

Displaying Multiple Images

Multi-image Display Screen

You can display 4, 9, 16, 36 or 81 thumbnail images on the monitor at the same time. The default setting is nine-image display.

1

Turn the rear e-dial (

S

) to the left (toward

f

) in

Playback mode.

The multi-image display screen appears.

Up to nine thumbnail images are displayed at once.

Selection frame

7

INFO 100-0001

Scroll bar

Available operations

Four-way controller

( 2345 )

M

button

Moves the selection frame.

Displays the [Multi-img Display Setting] screen. Use the four-way controller ( 45 ) to select the number of images to display at the same time.

Multi-img Display Setting

Display Type

i button

MENU

Cancel

INFO OK

OK

(Display Type cannot be selected when developing

multiple RAW images (p.240).)

Selects multiple images and deletes them. (p.220)

2

Press the

4

button.

A full screen display of the selected image appears.

Icons such as

C

and

?

are not displayed with thumbnail images for 81-image display.

213

Displaying Images by Folder

Images will be grouped and displayed by folder in which they are saved.

1

In the multi-image display screen, turn the rear e-dial

(

S

) to the left (toward

f

) again.

The folder display screen appears.

2

Select the folder you want to display.

The number of images saved in the selected folder appears at the top right of the screen.

100

103

101

104

102

50

105

100_0105

Available operations

(

Four-way controller

2345 ) i

button

Moves the selection frame.

Deletes the selected folder and all the images in it. (p.221)

3

Press the

4

button.

The multi-image display screen for the selected folder appears.

7

214

Displaying Images by the Shooting Date

(Calendar Display)

7

Images will be grouped and displayed by the shooting date.

1

In the multi-image display screen, press the

M

button.

The [Multi-img Display Setting] screen appears.

2

Press the

M

button again.

The calendar display screen appears.

Only the dates when pictures were taken are displayed.

Number of images shot on this date

2/5

2012.

10

WED

FRI

17

19

MON

29

2012.

11

THU

WED

8

11

14

SAT 17

Delete

INFO

Shooting date

Thumbnail

Available operations

Four-way controller (

23

) Selects a shooting date.

Four-way controller (

45

) Selects an image taken on the selected shooting date.

Rear e-dial (

S

) to the right ( y

)

M

button i

button

(

Displays the selected image. Turn to the left f

) to return to the calendar display.

The camera returns to the multi-image display screen.

Deletes selected images.

3

Press the

4

button.

A full screen display of the selected image appears.

Joining Multiple Images (Index)

Join a number of images together and display them as an index print. You can select the images to include in the index print or have them randomlyarranged.

This function is not available for movies.

215

1

Press the four-way controller (

3

) in Playback mode.

The playback mode palette appears.

2

Use the four-way controller (

2345

) to select

p

(Index) and press the

4

button.

The [Index] screen appears.

3

Press the four-way controller (

5

).

4

Use the four-way controller (

23

) to select a layout and press the

4

button.

You can select o

(Thumbnail), p

(Square), q

(Random1), r

(Random2), s

(Random3) or p

(Bubble).

Images are displayed according to the file number (from the smallest number) for o

, and are displayed in random order for other layouts.

Index

Layout

Images

Backgrnd.

Selection

Create an index image

MENU Cancel OK OK

5

Use the four-way controller (

23

) to select [Images] and press the four-way controller (

5

).

6

Use the four-way controller (

23

) to select the number of images and press the

4

button.

You can select 12, 24 or 36 images.

When the number of saved images is smaller than the number selected, empty spaces will appear when [Layout] is set to o

(Thumbnail) and some images may be duplicated for other layouts.

7

216

7

7

Use the four-way controller (

23

) to select [Backgrnd.] and press the four-way controller (

5

).

8

Use the four-way controller (

23

) to select the background color and press the

4

button.

You can select a white or black background.

9

Use the four-way controller (

23

) to select [Selection] and press the four-way controller (

5

).

10

Use the four-way controller (

23

) to select a type of image selection and press the

4

button.

u

Auto w

Manual x

Folder name

Picks images automatically from all of the images saved.

Individually select images you want to include in the index. Continue by selecting [Select image(s)] and select the individual images.

Picks images automatically from the folder selected. Continue by selecting [Select a folder] and select the folder.

11

Use the four-way controller (

23

) to select [Create an index image] and press the

4

button.

The index image is created and a confirmation screen appears.

12

Use the four-way controller (

23

) to select [Save] or

[Reshuffle] and press the

4

button.

Save

Reshuffle

The index image is saved as a

P

and

C

file.

Reselects the images to be included in the index and displays a new index image. However, if o

(Thumbnail) is selected for [Layout], this item is not displayed.

After the index image is saved, the camera returns to Playback mode and the index image is displayed.

Processing may take a while when creating an index image.

Playing Back Images Continuously

You can play back all images saved on your SD Memory Card successively in the slideshow.

Setting the Slideshow Display

Sets how images will be displayed during the Slideshow.

1

Select [Slideshow] in the [

Q

Playback 1] menu and press the four-way controller (

5

).

The screen to make the slideshow settings appears.

2

Use the four-way controller

(

23

) to select an item you want to change.

Slideshow starts

Start

The following items can be changed.

Interval

Screen Effect

Repeat Playback

3sec.

MENU OK OK

7

Item

Interval

Screen

Effect

Repeat

Playback

Description

Select an image display interval.

Select a transition effect when the next image is displayed.

Set whether to start the slideshow again from the beginning after the last image is displayed.

Setting

3sec. (default setting)/

5sec./10sec./30sec.

Off (default setting)/Fade/

Wipe/Stripe

P

(default setting)/

O

3

Press the four-way controller (

5

) and use the four-way controller (

23

) to change the setting and press the

4

button.

217

218

Starting the Slideshow

1

Select [Start] in Step 2 on p.217 and press the

4

button.

Or, select

u

(Slideshow) in the playback mode palette and press the

4

button.

The start screen is displayed and the slideshow begins.

Start

OK

7

Available operations

4 button

Four-way controller ( 4 )

Four-way controller (

5

)

Pauses playback. Press again to resume playback.

Shows the previous image.

Shows the next image.

2

Press the four-way controller (

3

).

Slideshow stops and the single image display reappears.

After slideshow ends, the camera returns to the single image display even if you do not press the four-way controller (

3

).

For movies, only the first frame is displayed and then the next image is displayed after the set interval has elapsed. To play back a movie during a slideshow, press the 4 button while the first frame is displayed. When the movie playback is finished, the slideshow will resume.

Rotating Images

When pictures are taken with this camera held vertically, the vertical position sensor activates and rotation information is added to the image to enable playback with the correct image orientation. You can change the rotation information and save the image using the following procedure.

• When [23. Saving Rotation Info] in the [

A

Custom Setting 4] menu is set to

[Off], the image rotation information is not saved when shooting.

• When [Auto Image Rotation] (p.210) in the [

Q

Playback 1] menu is set to

O

(On), an image with rotation information is automatically rotated during playback.

• You cannot change the image rotation information in the following conditions.

- when the image is protected

- when the image rotation information tag is not saved with the image

- when [Auto Image Rotation] (p.210) in the [

Q

Playback 1] menu is set to

P

(Off)

• Movie files cannot be rotated.

1

Select the image you want to rotate in Playback mode.

2

Press the four-way controller (

3

).

The playback mode palette appears.

3

Use the four-way controller (

2345

) to select

s

(Image

Rotation) and press the

4

button.

The selected image is rotated in 90° increments and the four thumbnail images are displayed.

4

Use the four-way controller

(

2345

) to select a desired rotation direction and press the

4

button.

The image rotation information is saved.

7

MENU

Cancel OK OK

219

220

Deleting Multiple Images

You can delete multiple images at once. Be aware that deleted images cannot be restored.

1

Protecting Images from Deletion (Protect) (p.222)

Deleting Selected Images

You can delete multiple images in the multi-image display at once.

• Protected images cannot be deleted.

• You can select up to 100 images at a time.

7

1

Turn the rear e-dial (

S

) to the left (toward

f

) in

Playback mode.

The multi-image display screen appears.

2

Press the

i

button.

The screen to select the images to delete is displayed.

The screen temporarily changes to 36-image display when [Multi-img

Display Setting] (p.212) is set to 81-image display.

3

Select the images to delete.

MENU Delete OK

Available operations

Four-way controller

( 2345 )

4 button

Moves the selection frame.

Rear e-dial (

S

)

Adds

O

and selects an image. Press again to return to P . Protected images ( Z ) cannot be selected.

Displays a full screen display of the image selected with the selection frame. When the image is displayed full screen, press the four-way controller (

45

) to display the previous or next image.

4

Press the

i

button.

The delete confirmation screen appears.

5

Press the four-way controller (

2

) to select [Select &

Delete] and press the

4

button.

The selected images are deleted.

Deleting a Folder

You can delete a selected folder and all the images in it.

1

Turn the rear e-dial (

S

) two clicks to the left (toward

f

) in Playback mode.

The folder display screen appears.

2

Use the four-way controller

(

2345

) to select a folder to delete and press the

i

button.

The delete folder confirmation screen appears.

100

103

101

104

102

105

50

7

100_0105

3

Press the four-way controller (

2

) to select [Delete] and press the

4

button.

The selected folder and all images in it are deleted.

The confirmation screen appears when there are protected images. Use the fourway controller (

23

) to select [Delete All] or [Leave All] and press the 4 button.

When [Delete All] is selected, protected images are also deleted.

3image(s)

Protected images are found

Delete All

Leave All

OK OK

221

222

Deleting All Images

You can delete all saved images at once.

1

Select [Delete All Images] in the [

Q

Playback 1] menu and press the four-way controller (

5

).

The confirmation screen for deleting all images is displayed.

2

Press the four-way controller (

2

) to select [Delete All

Images] and press the

4

button.

All images are deleted.

The confirmation screen appears when there are protected images. Use the four-way controller (

23

) to select [Delete All] or [Leave All] and press the 4 button.

When [Delete All] is selected, protected images are also deleted.

Protecting Images from Deletion (Protect)

7

You can protect images from being accidentally deleted.

Even protected images are deleted if the inserted SD Memory Card is formatted.

1

Press the four-way controller (

3

) in Playback mode.

The playback mode palette appears.

2

Use the four-way controller (

2345

) to select

Z

(Protect) and press the

4

button.

The screen to select the protection setting method is displayed.

3

Use the four-way controller (

23

) to select [Single Image] or [All

Images] and press the

4

button.

If you selected [All Images], proceed to

Step 5.

Single Image

All Images

OK OK MENU

4

Use the four-way controller (

45

) to select an image to protect.

5

Press the four-way controller (

2

) to select [Protect] and press the

4

button.

Select [Unprotect] to cancel the protection of the image.

The image is protected and the Y icon appears at the top right of the screen.

MENU

Exit

Protect

Unprotect

OK

OK

Repeat Steps 4 and 5 to protect other images.

If you selected [All Images] in Step 3, the camera returns to the playback mode.

6

Press the

3

button.

The camera returns to Playback mode.

223

7

224

Connecting the Camera to an AV

Device

You can connect the camera to a TV or other device with a video input terminal or HDMI terminal and play back images.

• If you intend to use the camera continuously for a long period, use of the AC

adapter kit (optional) is recommended. (p.52)

• For an AV device with multiple video input terminals, check the operating manual of the AV device, and select a suitable video input terminal for connecting the camera.

• You cannot output both composite and HDMI video signals at the same time.

• You cannot adjust the volume on the camera while the camera is connected to the AV device. Adjust the volume on the AV device.

• If you want to view a movie on an external monitor while recording it, connect the camera to an AV device with a mini HDMI terminal. You cannot output a movie using the video input terminal while recording.

Connecting the Camera to a Video Input Terminal

7

Use the provided AV cable I-AVC7 to connect the camera to a device with a video input terminal.

1

Turn the AV device and camera off.

2

Open the terminal cover, face the arrow on the AV cable toward the

2

mark on the camera, and connect the cable to the PC/AV terminal.

3

Connect the other end of the AV cable to the video input terminal on the AV device.

4

Turn the AV device and camera on.

The camera turns on in video mode, and the camera information is displayed on the screen of the connected AV device.

Even if you used an external microphone to record movie sound in stereo, monaural sound is played back.

Selecting the Video Output Format

When the hometown is set at the time of initial setting (p.60), the video

output format is set in accordance with that region. Depending on the country or region, images may fail to be played back with the set video output format. If this happens, change the video output format setting.

1

Select [Video Out] in the [

R

Set-up 2] menu and press the four-way controller (

5

).

2

Use the four-way controller (

23

) to select [NTSC] or [PAL] and press the

4

button.

1 2 3 4

Brightness Level

LCD Color Tuning

Video Out

HDMI Out

USB Connection

Folder Name

Create New Folder

MENU Cancel

±0

NTSC

PAL

MSC

Date

OK OK

3

Press the

3

button.

The screen that was displayed before selecting the menu appears again.

7

The video output format differs depending on the region. When you set [Setting

the Time] in the World Time setting (p.253) to

X

(Destination), the video output

setting changes to the video output format for that city. Refer to “List of World

Time Cities” (p.255) for cities that can be selected as a hometown or

destination.

225

226

Connecting the Camera to an HDMI Terminal

Use a commercially available HDMI cable to connect the camera to a device with an HDMI terminal.

1

Turn the AV device and camera off.

2

Open the terminal cover and connect the HDMI cable to the mini HDMI terminal.

7

3

Connect the other end of the HDMI cable to the HDMI input terminal on the AV device.

4

Turn the AV device and camera on.

The camera turns on in HDMI mode, and the camera information is displayed on the screen of the connected AV device.

• The camera has a mini HDMI terminal (Type C). Use a commercially available HDMI cable that matches your AV device.

• Nothing is displayed on the camera monitor during HDMI output.

• If you used an external microphone to record movie sound in stereo, the sound is played back in stereo.

Selecting the HDMI Output Format

By default, the maximum resolution is automatically selected to suit the AV device and camera. However, if it fails to play back images properly, change the HDMI output format setting.

1

Select [HDMI Out] in the [

R

Set-up 2] menu and press the four-way controller (

5

).

2

Use the four-way controller (

23

) to select the HDMI output format.

Auto

1080i

720p

480p

*1

The maximum resolution that the AV device and camera support is automatically selected. (default setting)

1920×1080i

1280×720p

720×480p

1 2 3 4

Brightness Level

LCD Color Tuning

Video Out

HDMI Out

USB Connection

Folder Name

Create New Folder

MENU Cancel

±0

NTSC

Auto

720p

OK OK

*1 This depends on the selected video output format; [480p] for NTSC and [576p]

(720×576p) for PAL.

3

Press the

4

button.

4

Press the

3

button.

The screen that was displayed before selecting the menu appears again.

7

227

• When the HDMI output format is set to [1080i] or [720p], the display of the AV device may appear with a screen design that differs from that displayed on the camera.

• The Bright/Dark Area warning is not displayed during Live View.

• When the exposure mode is set to C (Movie), the output format is fixed to

[480p] regardless of the HDMI output format setting.

228

Memo

8

Processing Images

This chapter describes how to process pictures taken and edit RAW images.

Changing the Image Size ...................................230

Processing Images with Digital Filters .............233

Developing RAW Images ...................................238

230

Changing the Image Size

Changes the number of recorded pixels and quality level of the image, and saves the image as a new file.

Changing the Number of Recorded Pixels and

Quality Level (Resize)

Changes the number of recorded pixels and quality level of the selected image and saves it as a new image.

8

• Only JPEG images captured with this camera can be resized.

• Images already resized to

S

or

Z

with this camera cannot be resized.

1

Select an image to resize in Playback mode.

2

Press the four-way controller (

3

).

The playback mode palette appears.

3

Use the four-way controller (

2345

) to select

n

(Resize) and press the

4

button.

The screen to select the recorded pixels and quality level appears.

4

Use the four-way controller (

45

) to select the desired image size.

You can select one of the image sizes starting from one size smaller than that of the original image. The selectable sizes vary according to the original image size.

16

M

10

M

OK MENU

5

Press the four-way controller (

3

) and use the four-way controller (

45

) to select the quality level.

You can select

Z

,

C

,

D

or

E

.

6

Press the

4

button.

The save confirmation screen appears.

7

Use the four-way controller (

23

) to select [Save as] and press the

4

button.

The resized image is saved as a new image.

231

Cutting Out Part of the Image (Cropping)

Cuts out only the desired area of the selected image and saves it as a new image. The aspect ratio can also be changed.

• Only JPEG and RAW images captured with this camera can be cropped.

• Images already resized to

S

or

Z

with this camera cannot be cropped.

1

Select an image to crop in Playback mode.

2

Press the four-way controller (

3

).

The playback mode palette appears.

3

Use the four-way controller (

2345

) to select

o

(Cropping) and press the

4

button.

The cropping frame to specify the size and position of the area to crop appears on the screen.

4

Specify the size and position of the area to crop by using the cropping frame.

8

MENU

INFO

3:2

OK

232

Available operations

Rear e-dial (

S

)

Four-way controller

( 2345 )

M

button

Changes the size of the cropping frame.

Moves the cropping frame.

Changes the aspect ratio. Select from [3:2], [4:3],

[16:9] or [1:1]. The image can also be rotated from -45° to +45° in increments of 1°.

Aspect Ratio

Image Rotation

3:2

±0°

8

MENU

|

button Rotates the cropping frame in 90° increments.

|

appears only when the cropping frame can be rotated.

5

Press the

4

button.

The save confirmation screen appears.

6

Use the four-way controller ( press the

4

button.

23

) to select [Save as] and

The cropped image is saved as a new image.

Processing Images with Digital

Filters

233

You can edit captured images using digital filters.

The following filters are available.

Filter Name

Toy Camera

Retro

High

Contrast

Effect

Creates an image that looks as though it was shot with a toy camera.

Creates an image with the look of an old photo.

Parameter

Shading Level: Low/Medium/High

Blur: Low/Medium/High

Tone Break: Red/Green/Blue/Yellow

Toning (B-A): 7 levels

Frame Composite: None/Thin/

Medium/Thick

Enhances the contrast in the image.

+1 to +5

Sketch Filter

Creates an image that looks as though it was drawn with a pencil.

Contrast: Low/Medium/High

Scratch Effect: OFF/ON

Water Color

Pastel

Posterization

Miniature

Base

Parameter

Adj

Monochrome

Creates an image that looks as though it was painted.

Blurs part of the image to create a fake miniature scene.

Adjusts the parameters to create the desired image.

Creates a monochrome image such as a black-andwhite photo.

Intensity: Low/Medium/High

Saturation: OFF/Low/Medium/High

Creates an image that looks as though it was drawn with a crayon.

Lessens the tone of the image to create an image that looks as though it was hand-drawn.

Low/Medium/High

+1 to +5

In-Focus Plane: -3 to +3

In-Focus Width: Narrow/Middle/Wide

In-Focus Plane Angle: Horizon/

Vertical/Positive Slope/Negative Slope

Blur: Low/Medium/High

Brightness: -8 to +8

Saturation: -3 to +3

Hue: -3 to +3

Contrast: -3 to +3

Sharpness: -3 to +3

Filter Effect: OFF/Red/Green/Blue/

Infrared Filter

Toning (B-A): 7 levels

8

234

8

Filter Name

Color

Extract

Color

Soft

Starburst

Fish-eye

Slim

HDR

Custom

Filter

Effect

Adds a color filter to the image.

Extracts one or two specific colors and makes the rest of the image black and white.

Parameter

Color: Red/Magenta/Blue/Cyan/

Green/Yellow

Color Density: Light/Standard/Dark

Extracted Color 1: Red/Magenta/

Blue/Cyan/Green/Yellow

Extractable Range of Color 1: +1 to +5

Extracted Color 2: OFF/Red/

Magenta/Blue/Cyan/Green/Yellow

Extractable Range of Color 2: +1 to +5

Soft Focus: Low/Medium/High Creates an image with a soft focus throughout the image.

Shadow Blur: OFF/ON

For taking pictures of night scenes or lights reflected on water with a special sparkling look by adding extra glitter to the highlights.

Shape: Cross/Star/Snow Crystal/

Heart/Musical Note

Effect Density: Small/Medium/Large

Size: Small/Medium/Large

Angle: 0°/30°/45°/60°

Creates an image that looks as though it was shot with a fish-eye lens.

Changes the horizontal and vertical ratio of images.

Creates an image that looks like a high dynamic range image.

Low/Medium/High

-8 to +8

Low/Medium/High

Customize and save a filter to your own preferences.

High Contrast: OFF/+1 to +5

Soft Focus: OFF/+1 to +3

Tone Break: OFF/Red/Green/Blue/

Yellow

Shading Type: 6 types

Shading Level: -3 to +3

Distortion Type: 3 types

Distortion Level: OFF/Low/Medium/

High

Invert Color: OFF/ON

Only JPEG and RAW images captured with this camera can be edited using the Digital Filter.

235

Applying the Digital Filter

1

Select an image for applying the digital filter in Playback mode.

2

Press the four-way controller (

3

).

The playback mode palette appears.

3

Use the four-way controller (

2345

) to select

D

(Digital

Filter) and press the

4

button.

The screen to select a filter appears.

4

Use the four-way controller

(

2345

) to select a filter and press the

4

button.

After selecting a filter, you can check the effect on the screen.

You can turn the front e-dial (

R

) to select a different image.

MENU Exit OK OK

5

Use the four-way controller (

23

) to select a parameter and the four-way controller (

45

) to adjust the value.

8

MENU OK

6

Press the

4

button.

The save confirmation screen appears.

236

7

Use the four-way controller ( to select [Use filters in

23

) combination] or [Save as].

Select [Use filters in combination] when you want to apply additional filters to the same image.

Use filters in combination

Save as

Cancel

MENU OK OK

8

Press the

4

button.

If [Use filters in combination] was selected, the screen that was displayed in Step 4 appears again.

If [Save as] was selected, the filter-processed image is saved as a new image.

Up to 20 filters, including a digital filter used during shooting (p.143), can be

combined to the same image.

Recreating Filter Effects

8

Retrieves the setting of an image with filter effects and applies the same filter effects to other images.

1

Select a filter-processed image in Playback mode.

2

Select

D

(Digital Filter) in the playback mode palette and press the

4

button.

3

Use the four-way controller ( to select [Recreating filter

23

) effects] and press the

4

button.

The history of the filter usage for the selected image appears.

Applying the digital filter

Recreating filter effects

Searching for the original image

MENU OK OK

4

To check the parameter details, press the

M

button.

You can check the filter parameters.

Press the

M

button again to return to the previous screen.

1.

2.

3.

4.

MENU

5.

6.

7.

8.

9.

10.

11.

12.

INFO

Details

13.

14.

15.

16.

17. - -

18. - -

19. - -

20. - -

OK

OK

5

Press the

4

button.

The image selection screen appears.

6

Use the four-way controller (

45

) to select an image for applying the same filter effects and press the

4

button.

You can only select an image that has not been processed with a filter.

The save confirmation screen appears.

MENU OK OK

7

Use the four-way controller (

23

) to select [Save as] and press the

4

button.

The filter-processed image is saved as a new image.

237

8

If [Searching for the original image] is selected in Step 3, the original image prior to digital filter application can be retrieved. If the original image is no longer stored on the SD Memory Card, the message [Original image, prior to digital filter application, is not found] appears.

238

Developing RAW Images

You can convert captured RAW images into JPEG or TIFF images.

Only RAW images captured with this camera can be edited. RAW images and

JPEG images captured with other cameras cannot be edited on this camera.

Developing One RAW Image

8

1

Press the four-way controller (

3

) in Playback mode.

The playback mode palette appears.

2

Use the four-way controller (

2345

) to select

h

(RAW

Development) and press the

4

button.

The screen to select a development method is displayed.

3

Use the four-way controller (

23

) to select [Developing a Single

Image] and press the

4

button.

Developing a Single Image

The parameters recorded in the image file appear.

Proceed to Step 6 if you do not need to change the parameters.

Developing Multiple Images

MENU

If there are no images that can be processed, [No image can be processed] appears.

OK OK

4

Use the four-way controller

(

23

) to choose a parameter you want to change.

You can turn the front e-dial (

R

) to select a different image.

RAW JPEG

16

M

ISO

NR

239

MENU OK 100-0001

The following parameters can be changed.

Parameter

File Format

Recorded Pixels

Quality Level

*1

Custom Image

White Balance

*2

*1

Sensitivity

High-ISO NR

Shadow Correction

Distortion Correction

*3

Lat-Chromatic-Ab Adj

*3

Color Space

Value

JPEG/TIFF p

(4928×3264)/

J

(3936×2624)/

P

(3072×2048)/ i

(1728×1152)

Z

(Premium) /

C

(Best) /

D

(Better) /

E

(Good)

Bright/Natural/Portrait/Landscape/

Vibrant/Muted/Bleach Bypass/Reversal

Film/Monochrome

F

(Auto)/

G

(Daylight)/

H

(Shade)/

^

(Cloudy)/

J

D

(Fluorescent Light

Daylight Color)/ J

N

(Fluorescent Light

Daylight White)/

J

W

(Fluorescent Light

Cool White)/

J

L

(Fluorescent Light

Warm White)/

I

(Tungsten Light)/

L

(Flash)/ f

/ K (Manual)/

K

(Color

Temperature)

-2.0 to +2.0

Auto/Off/Low/Medium/High

Off/Low/Medium/High

Off/On

Off/On sRGB/AdobeRGB

Page

-

p.178

p.179

p.197

p.183

-

p.85

p.190

p.193

p.193

p.189

*1 This cannot be set when [File Format] is set to [TIFF]. (The setting is fixed to p

.)

*2 This cannot be set for RAW images taken in Multi-exposure mode.

*3 This can be selected only when a compatible lens is attached. (p.297)

8

240

5

Use the four-way controller (

45

) to change the value.

For File Format, Recorded Pixels, and Quality Level, press the four-way controller (

5

) and use the four-way controller (

23

) to select an item.

For Custom Image and White Balance, press the four-way controller (

5

) to display the setting screen.

6

Press the

4

button.

The save confirmation screen appears.

7

Use the four-way controller (

23

) to select [Save as] and press the

4

button.

The RAW image is developed and saved as a new image.

8

Use the four-way controller (

[Exit].

23

) to select [Continue] or

Select [Continue] to edit other images.

9

Press the

4

button.

If you select [Continue] in Step 8, the screen for selecting the parameters in Step 4 appears again.

8

Developing Multiple RAW Images

You can develop multiple RAW images with the same settings.

1

Select [Developing Multiple Images] in Step 3 on p.238 and

press the

4

button.

The multi-image display screen appears.

Refer to p.212 for details on operations during the multi-image display.

2

Use the four-way controller (

2345

) to select the RAW images to be developed and press the

4

button.

3

Press the

L

button.

The development confirmation screen appears.

4

Use the four-way controller (

23

) to select [Develop images as shot] or [Develop images with modified settings].

To change parameters, select [Develop images with modified settings].

Develop images as shot

Develop images with modified settings

MENU OK OK

5

Use the four-way controller

(

2345

) to set [File Format],

[Recorded Pixels] and [Quality

Level].

RAW JPEG

JPEG

16

M

If [TIFF] is selected, the [Recorded Pixels] and [Quality Level] settings are not available.

MENU OK

When [Develop images with modified

settings] is selected, refer to p.239 to change other parameters. All images

are developed with the same settings.

6

Press the

4

button.

The save confirmation screen appears.

7

Use the four-way controller (

23

) to select [Save as] and press the

4

button.

The selected RAW images are developed and saved as new images.

241

8

242

Memo

9

Changing Additional

Settings

This chapter describes how to change additional settings.

How to Operate the Set-up Menu ......................244

Formatting the SD Memory Card ......................246

Customizing Buttons and Dials ........................247

Setting the Beep, Date and Time, and Display

Language ............................................................252

Adjusting the Monitor and the Menu Display.....257

Setting the Folder/File Number .........................263

Selecting the Power Settings ............................266

Setting the Photographer Information .............269

Setting the DPOF Settings .................................271

Correcting Defective Pixels in the CMOS

Sensor (Pixel Mapping) ......................................273

Selecting Settings to Save in the Camera

(Memory) .............................................................274

244

How to Operate the Set-up Menu

Perform general settings related to the camera in the [

R

Set-up] menu.

Refer to “Using the Menus” (p.42) for details on how to use the menus.

9

Set-up Menu Setting Items

Perform the following settings in the [

R

Set-up 1-4] menus.

Press the 3 button in Capture/Playback mode and use the four-way controller ( 45 ) to display the [

R

Set-up 1-4] menus.

Menu Item

Language/ u

Date Adjustment

R

1

World Time

Text Size

Beep

Guide Display

Status Screen

Function

Changes the language in which menus and messages appear.

Sets the date format and time.

Sets the display of the local date and time of the specified city so they can be displayed on the monitor in addition to the present location when traveling overseas.

Sets the text size of an item selected on the respective menu screens.

Switches the beep tone on/off.

Sets whether to display indicators on the monitor.

Sets the display color of the status screen and control panel.

Page

p.256

p.253

p.253

p.257

p.252

p.257

p.258

245

Menu

R

R

R

2

3

4

Item Function

Brightness Level Changes the brightness of the monitor.

LCD Color Tuning Adjusts the color of the monitor.

Video Out

HDMI Out

Sets the output format when connecting to an AV device with a video input terminal.

Sets the HDMI output format when connecting to an AV device with an HDMI terminal.

USB Connection

Folder Name

Create New Folder

File Name

Copyright

Information

Auto Power Off

Select Battery

Reset

Pixel Mapping

Dust Alert

Dust Removal

Sensor Cleaning

Format

Sets the USB connection mode when connecting to a computer.

Sets the naming system of the folder for storing images.

Creates a new folder on the SD Memory

Card.

Sets the method used to assign file names for images.

Sets the photographer and copyright information embedded in Exif.

Sets the time until the camera turns off automatically.

Sets the battery to use when the optional battery grip is attached.

Resets all settings.

Maps out and corrects any defective pixels in the CMOS sensor.

Detects dust adhering to the CMOS sensor.

Cleans the CMOS sensor using ultrasonic vibrations.

Locks the mirror in the up position for cleaning the CMOS sensor with a blower.

Formats an SD Memory Card.

Page

p.260

p.261

p.225

p.227

p.279

p.263

p.263

p.264

p.269

p.266

p.267

p.296

p.273

p.301

p.300

p.303

p.246

9

246

Formatting the SD Memory Card

Use this camera to format (initialize) an SD Memory Card that is unused or has been used on other cameras or digital devices.

Formatting deletes all the data saved on the SD Memory Card.

• Do not remove the SD Memory Card while formatting. The card may be damaged and become unusable.

• Formatting deletes all data, both protected and unprotected. Be aware.

1

Select [Format] in the [

R

Set-up 4] menu and press the four-way controller (

5

).

The [Format] screen appears.

2

Press the four-way controller (

2

) to select [Format].

Format

All data will be deleted

9

Format

Cancel

OK OK

3

Press the

4

button.

Formatting starts.

When formatting is completed, the screen that was displayed before selecting the menu appears again.

When an SD Memory Card is formatted, the volume label assigned to the card is “K-5 II”. When this camera is connected to a computer, the SD Memory Card

is recognized as a removable disk with the name “K-5 II”. (p.280)

Customizing Buttons and Dials

You can set the functions for when the e-dials are turned, when the

| /

Y

button, = button or Preview dial is operated, and when the shutter release button is pressed halfway.

The current functions assigned to the buttons/dials can be checked with

guide display. (p.25)

Setting the Functions for the E-dials

For each exposure mode, you can set the functions for when the front and rear e-dials and

|

button are operated.

1

Select [E-Dial Programming] in the [

A

Rec. Mode 5] menu and press the four-way controller (

5

).

The [E-Dial Programming 1] screen appears.

2

Use the four-way controller

(

23

) to select an exposure mode.

Turn the rear e-dial (

S

) to display the

[E-Dial Programming 2] screen.

E-Dial Programming

P

Tv

Sv - -

Tv

Tv

Av

TAv

- -

Tv

Av

ISO

- -

Av

Av

- -

- -

1 2

P

- -

P LINE

MENU

3

Press the four-way controller (

5

).

The screen for the selected exposure mode appears.

4

Press the four-way controller (

5

) and use the four-way controller

(

23

) to select a function.

You can perform the following settings for each exposure mode.

Exposure Mode

Tv

Av

- -

Av

Tv

P SHIFT

P SHIFT

- - -

P

P

P

P LINE

P LINE

- -

9

MENU

Cancel

OK

OK

247

248

9

Exposure

Mode e

K b c

R

Front E-dial b o

– c m c b

– b m o c b c b c m e

SHIFT

–

– o e

SHIFT o m o

L

/ a

S

Rear E-dial m

– b m b o b c

– c b e

SHIFT m

– o

– o e SHIFT o c m c o c b p

– c o c c

– c o

|

Button

} e

} e e

LINE e

LINE

–

–

– e

LINE e LINE

–

–

–

–

–

– o

AUTO o AUTO

–

–

–

– o

AUTO o

AUTO e

LINE b

SHIFT c

SHIFT

–

–

–

–

–

Exposure

Mode

R

Front E-dial

S

Rear E-dial

|

Button

M

– c o c c

– c o c SHIFT

–

C

– c m c c

– c m c

SHIFT

– b

: Change shutter speed c

: Change aperture value o

: Change sensitivity m

: Adjust EV compensation value

} e

: Return to e e

LINE: Program line e

SHIFT: Program shift –: Not available

5

Press the

4

button.

6

Press the

3

button.

The screen that was displayed in Step 2 appears again.

Repeat Steps 2 to 6 to change the settings of other exposure modes.

7

Press the

3

button twice.

The camera is ready to take a picture.

Setting the Functions for the Buttons

You can set the functions for when the | /

Y

button, = button, or

Preview dial (main switch

|

) is operated, and when the shutter release button is pressed halfway.

1

Select [Button Customization] in the [

A

Rec. Mode 5] menu and press the four-way controller (

5

).

The [Button Customization] screen appears.

9

249

250

9

2

Use the four-way controller

(

23

) to select an item to set a function to and press the fourway controller (

5

).

Button Customization

RAW/Fx Button

AF Button

Preview Dial

Shutter Button Half Press

The screen to set the function for the selected item is displayed.

MENU

3

Press the four-way controller (

5

) and use the four-way controller (

23

) to select a function.

The following functions can be assigned to each button.

Button

| /

Y

button

= button

Preview

Dial

Setting

One Push File

Format

Exposure Bracketing

Digital Preview

Electronic Level

Composition Adjust.

GPS

Enable AF

Cancel AF

Optical Preview

Digital Preview

Function

Temporarily changes the file format.

Sets the Exposure

Bracketing.

Displays the Digital Preview.

p.120

Displays the Electronic Level on the monitor.

p.29

Displays the [Composition

Adjust.] screen.

Displays the Electronic

Compass, Simple Navigation, or ASTROTRACER screen when the optional GPS unit is attached to the camera.

p.195

p.305

The autofocus system operates.

Disables autofocus with the shutter release button while the button is pressed.

Displays the Optical Preview when the main switch is turned to the preview position

(

|

).

Displays the Digital Preview when the main switch is turned to the preview position

(

|

).

Page

p.181

p.138

p.110

p.118

Button

Shutter release button pressed halfway

Off

Setting

Enable AF

Off

(Live View only)

Function

The autofocus system operates.

The autofocus system does not operate when the shutter release button is pressed halfway.

Only during Live View, the autofocus system does not operate when the shutter release button is pressed halfway.

4

Press the

4

button.

5

Press the

3

button three times.

The camera is ready to take a picture.

Page

-

251

9

252

Setting the Beep, Date and Time, and

Display Language

Setting the Beep

9

You can turn the camera operation beep on or off, or change its volume.

By default, all available items are set to

O

(On), and the volume level is set to [3].

The following items can be set.

• In-focus

• AE-L (AE Lock operation sound)

• Self-timer

• Remote Control

• Mirror Up

• One Push File Format (operation sound when [One Push File Format] is assigned to the | /

Y

button)

• Press OK for 1 sec. (operation sound when Change AF point is enabled or disabled)

1

Select [Beep] in the [

R

Set-up 1] menu and press the fourway controller (

5

).

The [Beep 1] screen appears.

2

Press the four-way controller (

3

) and use the four-way controller (

45

) to adjust the volume.

Select from six levels. When set to

Z

(0), you can turn all the beeps off.

3

Use the four-way controller

(

23

) to choose an item.

Turn the rear e-dial (

S

) to display the

[Beep 2] screen.

Beep

Volume

In-focus

AE-L

Self-timer

Remote Control

Mirror Up

1 2

MENU

4

Use the four-way controller (

45

) to select

O

or

P

.

5

Press the

3

button twice.

The screen that was displayed before selecting the menu appears again.

253

Changing the Date and Time Display

You can change the initial date and time settings, and set their display formats. Choose [mm/dd/yy], [dd/mm/yy] or [yy/mm/dd] for the date display format, and [12h] (12-hour display) or [24h] (24-hour display) for the time display format.

Set in [Date Adjustment] in the [

R

Set-up 1] menu.

1

Setting the Date and Time (p.62)

Setting the World Time

The date and time selected in “Initial Settings” (p.60) serve as the date and

time of your present location.

Setting the destination in [World Time] enables you to display the local date and time on the monitor when traveling overseas.

1

Select [World Time] in the [

R

Set-up 1] menu and press the four-way controller (

5

).

The [World Time] screen appears.

2

Use the four-way controller (

45

) to select

X

(Destination) or

W

(Hometown) for [Setting the

Time].

World Time

Setting the Time

Destination

London

This setting is reflected on the date and time that appear in the guide display and control panel.

3

Press the four-way controller (

3

).

The selection frame moves to [ X Destination].

MENU

Hometown

New York

9

254

4

Press the four-way controller (

5

).

The [ X Destination] screen appears.

5

Use the four-way controller (

45

) to select a destination city.

Destination

Turn the rear e-dial (

S

) to change the region.

The location, time difference and current time of the selected city appear.

London

DST

MENU Cancel

6

Press the four-way controller (

23

) to select [DST].

+06:00

16:00

OK OK

7

Use the four-way controller (

45

) to select

O

or

P

.

Select

O

if the destination city uses daylight saving time (DST).

8

Press the

4

button.

The settings are saved and the screen that was displayed in Step 2 appears again.

9

Press the

3

button twice.

The screen that was displayed before selecting the menu appears again.

9

• Refer to “List of World Time Cities” (p.255) for cities that can be selected as

a destination.

• Select [ W Hometown] in Step 2 to change the city and DST setting.

•

X

appears in the guide display if [Setting the Time] is set to

X

(Destination).

(p.25) Also, the video output setting (p.225) changes to the video output

format for that city.

255

Region City

North

America

Central and

South

America

Europe

Africa/

West Asia

Honolulu

Anchorage

Vancouver

San Francisco

Los Angeles

Calgary

Denver

Chicago

Miami

Toronto

New York

Halifax

Mexico City

Lima

Santiago

Caracas

Buenos Aires

Sao Paulo

Rio de Janeiro

Lisbon

Madrid

London

Paris

Amsterdam

Milan

Rome

Copenhagen

Berlin

Prague

Stockholm

Budapest

Warsaw

Athens

Helsinki

Moscow

Dakar

Algiers

Johannesburg

List of World Time Cities

Video

Output

Format

PAL

PAL

PAL

PAL

PAL

PAL

NTSC

NTSC

NTSC

NTSC

PAL

PAL

NTSC

PAL

NTSC

NTSC

NTSC

NTSC

NTSC

NTSC

NTSC

NTSC

NTSC

NTSC

NTSC

NTSC

PAL

PAL

PAL

PAL

PAL

PAL

PAL

PAL

PAL

PAL

PAL

PAL

Region City

Africa/

West Asia

Istanbul

Cairo

Jerusalem

Nairobi

Jeddah

Tehran

Dubai

Karachi

Kabul

Male

Delhi

Colombo

Kathmandu

Dacca

East Asia Yangon

Bangkok

Kuala Lumpur

Vientiane

Singapore

Phnom Penh

Ho chi Minh

Jakarta

Hong Kong

Beijing

Shanghai

Manila

Oceania

Taipei

Seoul

Tokyo

Guam

Perth

Adelaide

Sydney

Noumea

Wellington

Auckland

Pago Pago

Video

Output

Format

PAL

PAL

NTSC

PAL

PAL

PAL

PAL

PAL

PAL

PAL

PAL

PAL

PAL

NTSC

PAL

PAL

PAL

PAL

PAL

PAL

PAL

PAL

PAL

PAL

PAL

PAL

NTSC

NTSC

NTSC

NTSC

PAL

PAL

PAL

PAL

PAL

PAL

NTSC

9

256

Setting the Display Language

You can change the language in which the menus, error messages, etc. are displayed.

Set in [Language/ u

] of the [

R

Set-up 1] menu.

1

Setting the Display Language (p.60)

9

Adjusting the Monitor and the Menu

Display

257

Setting the Text Size

You can set the text size of an item selected on the respective menu screens to [Standard] (normal display) or [Large] (magnified display).

Set in [Text Size] of the [

R

Set-up 1] menu.

1 2 3 4

English

Date Adjustment

World Time

Text Size

Beep

Guide Display

Status Screen

MENU

Cancel

Standard

Large

3sec.

OK OK

Setting the Guide Display Time

Set the length of time that the guides are displayed on the monitor when

the camera is turned on or the exposure mode is changed. (p.25)

Select from [3 sec.] (default setting), [10 sec.], [30 sec.] and [Off].

Set in [Guide Display] of the [

R

Set-up 1] menu.

1 2 3 4

English

Date Adjustment

World Time

Text Size

Beep

Guide Display

Status Screen

MENU Cancel

3sec.

30sec.

Off

OK OK

9

258

Setting the Initial Menu Tab Displayed

Set the initial menu tab displayed on the monitor when the 3 button is pressed.

1

Select [24. Save Menu Location] in the [

A

Custom

Setting 4] menu and press the four-way controller (

5

).

The [24. Save Menu Location] screen appears.

2

Use the four-way controller (

23

) to select [Reset Menu

Location] or [Save Menu Location] and press the

4

button.

1

Reset Menu

Location

The [

A

Rec. Mode 1] menu ([

A

Rec. Mode 4] menu when the exposure mode is set to

C

(Movie), and [

Q

Playback 1] menu when in Playback mode) is always displayed first. (default setting)

2

Save Menu

Location

The menu tab last selected is displayed first.

3

Press the

3

button.

The screen that was displayed before selecting the menu appears again.

9

Setting the Status Screen Display

You can set whether to display the status screen on the monitor and set the display color of the status screen and control panel.

1

Select [Status Screen] in the [

R

Set-up 1] menu and press the four-way controller (

5

).

The [Status Screen] screen appears.

2

Use the four-way controller

(

45

) to select

O

or

P

.

O

Displays the status screen. (default setting)

P

Does not display the status screen.

Status Screen

Enable

Auto Screen Rotation

Display Color 1

1/ 125

F

5.6

MENU

3

Use the four-way controller (

23

) to select [Auto Screen

Rotation] and use the four-way controller (

45

) to select

O

or

P

.

O

P

If the camera is held vertically while measuring the brightness, the status screen and control panel are displayed vertically. (default setting)

The status screen and control panel are always displayed horizontally.

4

Use the four-way controller (

23

) to select [Display Color] and use the four-way controller (

45

) to select from six display colors.

5

Press the

3

button twice.

The screen that was displayed before selecting the menu appears again.

259

9

Setting the Display for Instant Review

You can set the Instant Review display settings.

1

Select [Instant Review] in the [

A

Rec. Mode 5] menu and press the four-way controller (

5

).

The [Instant Review] screen appears.

260

2

Press the four-way controller (

5

) and use the four-way controller

(

23

) to select a display time.

Instant Review

Display Time

Histogram

Bright/Dark Area

Enlarge Instant Review

1sec.

3sec.

5sec.

Off

MENU Cancel OK OK

3

Press the

4

button.

4

Use the four-way controller (

23

) to select [Histogram],

[Bright/Dark Area] or [Enlarge Instant Review].

5

Use the four-way controller (

45

) to select

O

or

P

.

When [Enlarge Instant Review] is set to

O

(default setting), you can magnify the image with the rear e-dial (

S

). (p.211)

6

Press the

3

button twice.

The screen that was displayed before selecting the menu appears again.

Adjusting the Brightness of the Monitor

9

You can adjust the brightness of the monitor.

1

Select [Brightness Level] in the [

R

Set-up 2] menu and press the four-way controller (

5

).

The [Brightness Level] screen appears.

2

Use the four-way controller (

45

) to adjust the brightness.

Brightness Level

You can select from 15 brightness levels.

The value is reset to ±0 when the

| button is pressed.

MENU Cancel ±0 OK OK

3

Press the

4

button.

4

Press the

3

button.

The screen that was displayed before selecting the menu appears again.

261

Adjusting the Color of the Monitor

You can adjust the color of the monitor.

1

Select [LCD Color Tuning] in the [

R

Set-up 2] menu and press the four-way controller (

5

).

The [LCD Color Tuning] screen appears.

2

Adjust the color.

Seven levels are available on the G-M and B-A axes.

±0 ±0

MENU

Cancel ±0

OK

OK

Available operations

Four-way controller ( 23 ) Adjusts the tone of the colors between green (G) and magenta (M).

Four-way controller ( 45 ) Adjusts the tone of the colors between blue (B) and amber (A).

|

button

Front e-dial (

R

)

Resets the adjustment value.

Displays a saved image in the background so you can adjust the color while viewing the image. This is useful for matching the color of the monitor with that of a computer.

3

Press the

4

button.

4

Press the

3

button.

The screen that was displayed before selecting the menu appears again.

9

262

Setting the Electronic Level Display

This camera is equipped with an electronic level for detecting whether the camera is level, as indicated on the bar graph in the viewfinder and on the

LCD panel and monitor. Select whether to display the bar graph.

1

Select [Electronic Level] in the [

A

Rec. Mode 4] menu.

2

Use the four-way controller (

45

) to select

O

or

P

.

O

Displays the bar graph of the electronic level.

P

Does not display the bar graph of the electronic level. (default setting)

3

Press the

3

button.

The screen that was displayed before selecting the menu appears again.

The bar graph can be displayed on the monitor when the

M

button is

pressed in the control panel. (p.26) When [Electronic Level] is assigned to the

| /

Y

button (p.249), press the

| /

Y

button while the status screen or

Live View is displayed to display the electronic level. (p.149)

9

Setting the Folder/File Number

Changing the Naming System of the Folder

You can select a naming system of the folder for storing images.

Set in [Folder Name] in the [

R

Set-up 2] menu.

Date

PENTX

The two digits of the month and day on which the picture was taken are assigned as the folder name in the form of [xxx_MMDD]. [xxx] is a sequential number from 100 to 999. [MMDD] (month and day) appears according to the

display style set in [Date Adjustment] (p.253). (default setting)

Example) 101_0125: Folder for images taken on January 25th

The folder name is assigned in the form of [xxxPENTX].

Example) 101PENTX

When the number of storable images exceeds 500, captured images are divided into folders of 500 images each. However, in Auto Bracketing shooting, images will be stored in the same folder until shooting is completed, even if the number of images exceeds 500.

Creating New Folders

Creates a new folder on an SD Memory Card. A folder is created with the number following the number of the folder currently being used.

1

Select [Create New Folder] in the [

R

Set-up 2] menu and press the four-way controller (

5

).

The [Create New Folder] screen appears.

2

Press the four-way controller ( to select [Create folder] and

2

) press the

4

button.

A folder with a new number is created.

Create New Folder

Creates a new storage folder with the following name:

101 PENTX

Create folder

Cancel

OK OK

9

263

264

Only one folder can be created using this operation. Multiple empty folders cannot be created consecutively.

Setting the File Name

9

You can change the file names of images.

The default naming conventions are as follows depending on the [Color

Space] (p.189) setting in the [

A

Rec. Mode 3] menu.

“xxxx” indicates the file number. This is displayed as a four-digit sequential number.

Color Space sRGB

File Name

IMGPxxxx.JPG

AdobeRGB _IGPxxxx.JPG

For sRGB, you can change [IMGP] (4 characters) to the desired characters.

For AdobeRGB, of the 4 characters you selected, the first 3 are assigned in place of [IGP].

Example: When set to [ABCDxxxx.JPG], files are named

[_ABCxxxx.JPG] for AdobeRGB.

1

Select [File Name] in the [

R

Set-up 3] menu and press the four-way controller (

5

).

The [File Name] screen appears.

2

Use the four-way controller (

23

) to select [Change] and press the four-way controller (

5

).

The text-entry screen appears.

Select [Reset File Name] to reset a changed file name to its default setting.

File Name sRGB

AdobeRGB

Change

I M G P xxxx.jpg

_ I G P xxxx.jpg

Reset File Name

MENU

3

Change the text.

File Name

Text selection cursor

Finish

Text input cursor

MENU Cancel OK Enter

Available operations

Four-way controller

(

2345

)

Rear e-dial (

S

)

4 button

Moves the text selection cursor.

Moves the text input cursor.

Enters a character selected with the text selection cursor at the position of the text input cursor.

4

After entering the text, move the text selection cursor to

[Finish] and press the

4

button.

The file name is changed.

5

Press the

3

button twice.

The screen that was displayed before selecting the menu appears again.

265

Selecting the File Number Setting

You can select a method for assigning the file number of an image when

saved to a new folder. Set in [File No.] of [Memory] (p.274) in the [

A

Rec.

Mode 4] menu.

O

P

The file number of the last image saved to the previous folder is saved and subsequent images are assigned sequential file numbers even if a new folder is created.

The file number of the first image saved to a folder returns to 0001 each time a new folder is created for saving images.

9

266

Selecting the Power Settings

9

Setting the Auto Power Off Function

You can set the camera to turn off automatically if unused after a certain length of time. Select from [1min.] (default setting), [3min.], [5min.],

[10min.], [30min.] or [Off].

Set in [Auto Power Off] of the [

R

Set-up 3] menu.

1 2 3 4

File Name

Copyright Information

Auto Power Off

Select Battery

Reset

MENU Cancel

IMGP

1min.

3min.

5min.

10min.

30min.

Off

OK OK

• The Auto Power Off function does not work in the following situations.

- when the Live View image is displayed

- when the slideshow is played back

- when the camera is connected to a computer with a USB cable

• If the camera turns off after the set length of time, perform one of the following operations to reactivate it.

- Turn on the camera again.

- Press the shutter release button halfway.

- Press the Q button, 3 button or

M

button.

Selecting a Battery

You can set the battery priority to the camera or the battery grip when the optional battery grip D-BG4 is attached.

1

Select [Select Battery] in the [

R

Set-up 3] menu and press the four-way controller (

5

).

The [Select Battery] screen appears.

2

Press the four-way controller (

5

).

3

Use the four-way controller (

23

) to select a battery to be prioritized and press the

4

button.

Select Battery

Auto Select

Body First

Grip First

Auto Select

Body First/

Grip First

Priority is given to the battery with more power remaining.

(default setting)

Priority is given to the selected battery.

MENU Cancel OK OK

4

When using AA batteries in the battery grip, use the fourway controller (

23

) to select [AA Battery Type] and press the four-way controller (

5

).

5

Use the four-way controller (

23

) to select the AA battery type and press the

4

button.

When set to [Auto-detect], the camera will automatically detect the type of batteries being used.

Select Battery

AA Battery Type

AUTO

Ni-MH

AL

Li

AUTO

Auto-detect

Nickel-Metal Hydride

Alkaline

Lithium

MENU Cancel OK OK

6

Press the

3

button twice.

The screen that was displayed before selecting the menu appears again.

9

267

268

• If a battery is inserted into both the body and grip, the battery levels of both are checked when the power is turned on. Regardless of the [Select Battery] setting, both batteries are slightly used.

• When the currently selected battery runs out as a result of the check, the message [Battery depleted] appears on the monitor. Turn the camera off and on again, and the camera will switch to the remaining battery.

• You can check the battery usage condition on the status screen and LCD

panel. (p.51)

When the type of AA batteries inserted in the battery grip differs from the battery type setting in Step 5, the battery level will not be correctly determined.

Please set the correct battery type. Usually, there is no problem using [Autodetect]. However in low temperatures and when using batteries that were stored for long periods of time, set the appropriate battery type so the camera can correctly determine the remaining battery level.

9

Setting the Photographer Information

269

The camera type, shooting conditions and other information are automatically embedded in captured images in the Exif data format. You can embed photographer information in this Exif.

Use the provided software (p.283) to check the Exif information.

1

Select [Copyright Information] in the [

R

Set-up 3] menu and press the four-way controller (

5

).

The [Copyright Information] screen appears.

2

Use the four-way controller

(

45

) to select

O

or

P

.

Copyright Information

Embed Copyright Data

O

P

Embeds copyright information in the

Exif.

Does not embed copyright information in the Exif. (default setting)

Photographer

Copyright Holder

MENU

3

Use the four-way controller (

23

) to select [Photographer] and press the four-way controller (

5

).

The text-entry screen appears.

4

Enter the text.

Text selection cursor

Up to 32 single-byte alphanumeric characters and symbols can be entered.

Text input cursor

Photographer

F i n i s h

Delete One Character

MENU Cancel OK Enter

9

270

Available operations

Four-way controller

(

2345

)

Rear e-dial (

S

)

|

button

4 button i button

Moves the text selection cursor.

Moves the text input cursor.

Switches between upper and lower case letters.

Enters a character selected with the text selection cursor at the position of the text input cursor.

Deletes a character at the position of the text input cursor.

5

After entering the text, move the text selection cursor to

[Finish] and press the

4

button.

The camera returns to the [Copyright Information] screen.

6

Use the four-way controller (

23

) to select [Copyright

Holder] and enter the text in the same way as

[Photographer].

7

Press the

3

button twice.

The screen that was displayed before selecting the menu appears again.

9

Setting the DPOF Settings

By adding DPOF (Digital Print Order Format) settings to stored images on the SD Memory Card, you can specify the number of copies and whether to imprint the date on the images in advance and order conventional photograph prints by taking this SD Memory Card to a store for printing.

• DPOF settings cannot be applied to RAW images and movies.

• You can make DPOF settings for up to 999 images.

1

Press the four-way controller (

3

) in Playback mode.

The playback mode palette appears.

2

Use the four-way controller (

2345

) to select

r

(DPOF) and press the

4

button.

The screen to select how to change the settings is displayed.

3

Use the four-way controller (

23

) to select [Single Image] or [All

Images] and press the

4

button.

If you selected [All Images], proceed to

Step 5.

Single Image

All Images

MENU OK OK

4

Use the four-way controller (

45

) to select an Image.

5

Use the four-way controller (

23

) to select the number of copies.

You can set up to 99 copies.

K

appears at the top right of the screen for images with DPOF settings.

To cancel the DPOF settings, set the number of copies to [00].

01

MENU

Copies

Date

Date

OK OK

9

271

272

6

Turn the rear e-dial (

S

) to select

O

or

P

for printing the date.

O The date will be printed.

P

The date will not be printed.

Repeat Steps 4 to 6 to make DPOF settings for other images.

7

Press the

4

button.

The DPOF settings for the selected image is saved and the camera returns to Playback mode.

• Depending on the printer or printing equipment at the photo processing lab, the date may not be printed on the pictures.

• The number of copies specified for all images is applied to all the images, and that specified for a single image is canceled.

9

Correcting Defective Pixels in the

CMOS Sensor (Pixel Mapping)

Pixel Mapping is a function for mapping out and correcting defective pixels in the CMOS sensor.

1

Select [Pixel Mapping] in the [ the four-way controller (

5

).

R

Set-up 4] menu and press

The [Pixel Mapping] screen appears.

2

Press the four-way controller (

2

) to select [Pixel Mapping] and press the

4

button.

Defective pixels are mapped out and corrected, and the screen that was displayed before selecting the menu appears again.

When the battery level is low, the message [Not enough battery power remaining to activate Pixel Mapping] is displayed on the monitor. Use the AC adapter kit (optional) or change to the battery with ample power remaining.

273

9

274

Selecting Settings to Save in the

Camera (Memory)

You can select which function settings to save when the camera is turned off. The following function settings can be saved.

Function

Flash Mode

Drive Mode

White Balance

Custom Image

Sensitivity

EV Compensation

Flash Exposure Comp.

Default

Setting

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

Function

Cross Processing

Extended Bracketing

Digital Filter

HDR Capture

Playback Info Display

File No.

Default

Setting

P

O

P

P

O

O

[Memory] cannot be selected when the mode dial is set to

A

.

9

1

Select [Memory] in the [

A

Rec. Mode 5] menu and press the four-way controller (

5

).

The [Memory 1] screen appears.

2

Use the four-way controller (

23

) to choose an item.

Turn the rear e-dial (

S

) to display the

[Memory 2] screen.

Memory

Flash Mode

Drive Mode

White Balance

Custom Image

Sensitivity

EV Compensation

Flash Exposure Comp.

MENU

3

Use the four-way controller (

45

) to select

O

or

P

.

1 2

O

P

Settings are saved even when the camera is turned off.

Settings are cleared and returned to their default values when the camera is turned off.

4

Press the

3

button twice.

The screen that was displayed before selecting the menu appears again.

275

• Set [File No.] to

O

(On) to continue the sequential numbering for the file

name even if a new folder is created. Refer to “Selecting the File Number

Setting” (p.265).

• When the [

R

Set-up] menu is reset (p.296), all Memory settings return to the

default values.

9

276

Memo

10

Connecting to a

Computer

This chapter explains how to connect the camera to your computer, install the supplied CD-ROM, etc.

Manipulating Captured Images on a

Computer ............................................................278

Saving Images on Your Computer ....................279

Using the Provided Software ............................281

278

Manipulating Captured Images on a

Computer

The captured still pictures and movies can be transferred to a computer by connecting this camera using a USB cable and can be managed using the provided software.

We recommend the following system requirements to connect your camera to a computer or to use the software “PENTAX Digital Camera

Utility 4” included on the CD-ROM (S-SW132).

Windows

OS

Monitor

Others

Windows XP (SP3 or later), Windows Vista, or Windows 7 (can be run as a 32-bit application on any x64 Edition of Windows.)

CPU

RAM

Pentium D 3.0 GHz equivalent or higher (Intel Core 2 Duo processor 2.0 GHz equivalent or higher recommended)

2.0 GB or more (3.0 GB or more recommended)

Free Disk Space 1 GB or more (8 GB or more recommended)

1280×800 pixels or more (1920×1200 or more recommended) with 24-bit full color (approximately 16.77 million colors)

USB 2.0 port must be standard equipment

10

Macintosh

OS

Monitor

Others

Mac OS X 10.4.11, 10.5, 10.6, or 10.7

CPU

RAM

PowerPC G5 Dual-core 2.0 GHz or higher (Intel Core 2 Duo processor 2.0 GHz or higher recommended. Universal Binary format.)

2.0 GB minimum (4.0 GB or more recommended)

Free Disk Space 1 GB minimum (8 GB or more recommended)

1280×800 pixels or more (1920×1200 or more recommended) with 24-bit full color (approximately 16.77 million colors)

USB 2.0 port must be standard equipment

Saving Images on Your Computer

279

Setting the USB Connection Mode

Set the USB connection mode when connecting the camera to a computer.

1

Select [USB Connection] in the [

R

Set-up 2] menu and press the four-way controller (

5

).

2

Use the four-way controller (

23

) to select [MSC] or [PTP].

MSC

PTP

Mass Storage Class (default setting)

A general-purpose driver program that handles devices connected to a computer via USB as a memory device.

Picture Transfer Protocol

A protocol that allows transfer of digital images and control of digital cameras via USB.

Unless otherwise specified, select [MSC].

3

Press the

4

button.

4

Press the

3

button.

The screen that was displayed before selecting the menu appears again.

10

280

Connecting the Camera and a Computer

Connect the camera to a computer using the provided USB cable I-USB7.

1

Turn your computer on.

2

Turn the camera off, and use the USB cable to connect the

PC/AV terminal of the camera and the computer.

10

3

Turn your camera on.

The camera is recognized as a removable disk or an SD Memory Card with a volume label “K-5 II”.

If the “K-5 II” dialog appears when the camera is turned on, select [Open folder to view files using Windows Explorer] and click the OK button.

4

Save the captured images to your computer.

Copy the image file(s) or folder(s) to the hard disk of the computer.

5

Disconnect your camera from your computer.

The camera cannot be operated while it is connected to the computer. To operate the camera, terminate the USB connection on the computer, then turn off the camera and remove the USB cable.

Using the Provided Software

281

“PENTAX Digital Camera Utility 4” is included on the CD-ROM

(S-SW132). Using the PENTAX Digital Camera Utility 4, you can manage images saved on your computer, and develop RAW files taken with this camera and adjust the color of the images.

Compatible file formats: .bmp (BMP)/.jpg (JPEG)/.pef (files recorded in

PENTAX’s original RAW format)/.png (PNG)/.tif

(TIFF)/.dng (DNG format RAW file)

Installing the Software

You can install the software from the provided CD-ROM.

When multiple accounts have been setup on your computer, log on with an account that has administrative rights before installing the software.

1

Turn your computer on.

Make sure no other software is running.

2

Place the CD-ROM into the CD/DVD drive on the computer.

The [PENTAX Software Installer] screen appears.

If the [PENTAX Software Installer] screen does not appear

• For Windows

1 Click [My Computer] from the Start menu.

2 Double-click the [CD/DVD drive (S-SW132)] icon.

3 Double-click the [Setup.exe] icon.

• For Macintosh

1 Double-click the CD/DVD (S-SW132) icon on the desktop.

2 Double-click the [PENTAX Installer] icon.

10

282

3

Click [PENTAX Digital Camera

Utility 4].

For Macintosh, follow the instructions on the screen to perform subsequent steps.

4

Select the desired language in the [Choose Setup Language] screen and click [OK].

5

When the [InstallShield

Wizard] screen appears in the selected language, click

[Next].

Follow the instructions on the screen to perform subsequent steps.

10

Screens of the PENTAX Digital Camera Utility 4

When PENTAX Digital Camera Utility 4 is launched, the following screen

(browser) appears.

The screenshots used in this explanation are for Windows.

283

Browser tab set (default setting)

You can perform the file management functions such as viewing and organizing the images.

1

2

3 4 3

1

Menu Bar

This executes functions or makes various settings.

For Macintosh, the Menu bar appears at the top of the desktop.

2

Tool Bar

Frequently used functions are provided as Tool bar buttons.

5

10

284

3

Control Panel

Shooting information and settings of the selected image appear in this panel. The set of tab pages displayed in Control Panel can be changed by pressing the Browser, Laboratory and Custom buttons on the Tool bar.

4

File Display Pane

The file list and the images in the selected folder appear here.

5

Status Bar

Information on the selected item appears.

Laboratory tab set (default setting)

The control panel for adjusting the image appears here.

10

Custom tab set (default setting)

The screen display can be customized here.

The Custom tab pages enable you to customize whether to show/hide the various tab pages in accordance with your needs. By default, all tab pages are displayed.

285

Viewing Detailed Information on the Software

Refer to Help for details on using the software program.

1

Click the button on the Tool bar.

Or, select [PENTAX Digital Camera

Utility Help] from the [Help] menu.

10

286

Regarding Product Registration

To better serve you, please take a moment to register your software.

Click [Product Registration] on the

screen in Step 3 on p.282.

A world map for Internet Product

Registration is displayed. If your computer is connected to the

Internet, click the displayed country or region and then follow the instructions to register your software.

Note that you can only register online if your country or area is shown.

10

11

Appendix

Default Settings ..................................................288

Resetting the Menus ..........................................296

Functions Available with Various Lens

Combinations .....................................................297

Cleaning the CMOS Sensor ...............................300

Using the GPS Unit ............................................305

Error Messages ..................................................310

Troubleshooting .................................................313

Main Specifications ............................................315

Index ....................................................................321

WARRANTY POLICY ..........................................327

288

Default Settings

The table below shows the factory default settings.

The functions set in Memory (p.274) are saved even when the camera is

turned off.

Reset Setting

Yes: The setting returns to the default setting with the reset function

(p.296).

No : The setting is saved even after reset.

Direct Keys

Item Default Setting

Reset

Setting

Page

Drive Mode

Flash Mode

9 (Single Frame

Shooting)

Yes

Yes

p.132

p.125

p.127

p.138

p.130

p.69

White Balance

Custom Image

Depends on the capture mode

F

(Auto)

Bright

Yes

Yes

p.183

p.197

11

[

A

Rec. Mode] Menu

Item

USER Mode

*1

Exposure Mode

*1

File Format

JPEG Recorded Pixels

JPEG Quality

AF Settings

AUTO AF Point Setting

Expanded Area AF

Default Setting

A

1 e (Program

Automatic Exposure)

JPEG p

(4928×3264)

11 AF Points

P

(Off)

Reset

Setting

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Page

p.206

p.205

p.180

p.178

p.179

p.113

p.115

Item

Lens

Correction

Distortion Correction

Lat-Chromatic-Ab Adj

Cross Processing

Type

Extended

Bracketing

Bracketing Amount

Digital Filter

HDR

Capture

Multiexposure

HDR Capture

Auto Align

Number of Shots

Auto EV Adjustment

Interval

Number of Shots

Interval

Shooting

Start Interval

Start Time

Composition

Adjust.

X-Y direction

Rotation

Recall Previous Position

D-Range

Setting

ISO AUTO

Setting

Highlight Correction

Shadow Correction

Sensitivity limit

AUTO ISO Parameters

High-ISO NR

Slow Shutter Speed NR

Program Line

Color Space

RAW File Format

289

Default Setting

Off

Off

Off

Off

BA±1 (White

Balance)/

±1 (other than White

Balance)

Not use any filters

Off

P

(Off)

2 times

P

(Off)

00:00'01"

2 images

Now

12:00AM / 00:00

Center

±0°

P

(Off)

Off

Off

100 – 3200 s

(Standard)

Auto

Auto k

(Normal) sRGB

PEF

Reset

Setting

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Page

p.193

p.200

p.141

p.143

p.191

p.136

p.133

p.195

p.190

p.84

p.85

p.87

p.89

p.189

p.181

11

290

11

Item

Recorded Pixels

Movie

Quality Level

Sound

Cross Processing

Digital Filter

Movie Aperture Control

Shake Reduction

Autofocus Method

Show Grid

Info Overlay

Live

View

Histogram

Bright/Dark Area

Electronic Level

Horizon Correction

Shake Reduction

Input Focal Length

Electronic Compass

Simple Navigation

GPS

Instant

Review

ASTRO-

TRACER

(Bulb)

Timed

Exposure

Exposure

Time Preset

Precise

Calibration

Calibration

Positioning Interval

Auto Time Synch.

Display Time

Histogram

Bright/Dark Area

Enlarge Instant Review

Default Setting

Reset

Setting b

(1280×720,

16:9, 30 fps)

Yes g

(On)

Off

Yes

Yes

Yes

Not use any filters

Fixed

Yes

Yes l

(Off) Yes

I

(Face Detection AF) Yes

Yes

Yes

Off

O

(On)

P

(Off)

P

(Off)

P

(Off)

P

(Off) k

(On)

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

35 mm

—

—

—

—

P

(Off) Yes

5'00"

—

—

1min.

On

1 sec.

P

(Off)

P

(Off)

O

(On)

Yes

—

—

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Page

p.152

p.147

p.262

p.123

p.122

p.124

p.305

p.259

291

Digital

Preview

Histogram

Bright/Dark Area

Enlarge Instant Review e

Item Default Setting

P

(Off)

P

(Off)

O

(On)

R b

,

S c

,

|} e

Reset

Setting

Yes

Yes

Yes

Page

p.119

E-Dial

Programming

K b c

L

/ a p

M

C

| /

Y

Button

R

–,

S o

,

|

–

R b

,

S

–,

|

–

R

–,

S c ,

|

–

R b

,

S c

,

| e

LINE

R

–,

S c

,

|

–

R

–,

S c ,

|

–

R

–,

S c

,

| c

SHIFT

One Push File

Format

Enable AF

Optical Preview

Yes

p.247

Button

Customization

= Button

Preview Dial

Shutter Button Half

Press

Enable AF

Yes

p.249

Memory

Cross Processing,

Digital Filter, HDR

Capture

Other than the above functions

P

O

(Off)

(On)

Yes

Yes

p.274

Save USER Mode

–

Yes

*2

p.202

*1 Appears only when the mode dial is set to

A

.

*2 The saved settings are reset only with [Reset USER Mode] in the [Save USER Mode] screen.

11

292

Playback Mode Palette

Image Rotation

Digital Filter

Resize

Item

Cropping

Protect

Slideshow

Save as Manual WB

RAW Development

Index

Movie Editing

DPOF

Save Destination

11

[

Q

Playback] Menu

Item

Slideshow

Interval

Screen Effect

Repeat Playback

Quick Zoom

Bright/Dark Area

Auto Image Rotation

Delete All Images

Default Setting

–

Toy Camera

Maximum size according to the setting

Maximum size according to the setting

–

–

–

File Format: JPEG

Recorded Pixels: p

Quality Level:

C

–

–

–

–

Reset

Setting

–

Yes

–

–

No

–

–

Yes

–

–

No

–

Page

p.219

p.233

p.230

p.231

p.222

p.217

p.187

p.238

p.215

p.159

p.271

p.306

Default Setting

3 sec.

Off

P

(Off)

Off

P

(Off)

O

(On)

–

Reset

Setting

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

–

Page

p.217

p.210

p.222

293

[

R

Set-up] Menu

Item Default Setting

Language/ u

Date Adjustment

Setting the Time

World Time

Destination (City)

Destination (DST)

Hometown (City)

Hometown (DST)

Text Size

Beep

Volume

Setting

Guide Display

Status

Screen

Status Screen

Auto Screen Rotation

Display Color

Brightness Level

LCD Color Tuning

Video Out

HDMI Out

USB Connection

Folder Name

Create New Folder

File Name

Copyright

Information

Select

Battery

Embed Copyright

Data

Photographer

Copyright Holder

Auto Power Off

Select Battery

AA Battery Type

Reset

Pixel Mapping

Dust Alert

English

01/01/2012

W

(Hometown)

Same as Hometown

Same as Hometown

According to initial setting

According to initial setting

According to initial setting

3

All

O

(On)

3 sec.

O (On)

O

(On)

1

±0

±0

According to initial setting

Auto

MSC

Date

–

IMGP/_IGP

P

(Off)

–

–

1 min.

Auto Select

Auto-detect

–

–

–

Reset

Setting

No

No

Yes

No

No

No

No

No

Yes

No

–

–

–

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

No

Yes

Yes

Yes

–

No

*3

Page

p.256

p.253

p.253

p.257

p.252

p.257

p.258

p.260

p.261

p.225

p.227

p.279

p.263

p.263

p.264

p.269

p.266

p.267

p.296

p.273

p.301

11

294

Item

Dust

Removal

Dust Removal

Start-up Action

Sensor Cleaning

Format

Default Setting

–

O

(On)

–

–

Reset

Setting

–

Yes

–

–

*3 The setting can be reset only with [Reset File Name] in the [File Name] screen.

Page

p.300

p.303

p.246

11

[

A

Custom Setting] Menu

Item

1. EV Steps

2. Sensitivity Steps

3. Expanded Sensitivity

4. Meter Operating Time

5. AE-L with AF Locked

6. Link AE to AF Point

7. Auto EV Compensation

8. Auto Bracketing Order

9. One-Push Bracketing

10. WB Adjustable Range

11. WB When Using Flash

12. AWB in Tungsten Light

13. Color Temperature Steps

14. Superimpose AF Area

15. AF.S Setting

16. AF.C Setting

17. AF Assist Light

18. AF with Remote Control

19. Remote Control in Bulb

20. Release While Charging

21. Flash in Wireless Mode

22. LCD Panel Illumination

23. Saving Rotation Info

24. Save Menu Location

Default Setting

1/3 EV Steps

1 EV Step

Off

10 sec.

Off

Off

Off

0 - +

Off

Auto Adjustment

Auto White Balance

Subtle Correction

Kelvin

On

Focus-priority

Focus-priority

On

Off

Mode1

Off

On

High

On

Reset Menu Location

Page

p.113

p.109

p.109

p.109

p.129

p.102

p.71

p.172

p.38

p.219

p.258

p.106

p.84

p.84

p.104

p.115

p.104

–

p.138

p.140

p.185

p.185

–

p.188

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Reset

Setting

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Item

25. Catch-in Focus

26. AF Fine Adjustment

27. Using Aperture Ring

Reset Custom Functions

Default Setting

Off

Off

Prohibited

–

Reset

Setting

Yes

Yes

*4

Yes

–

Page

p.117

p.111

p.299

p.296

*4 The saved adjustment value is reset only with [Reset] in the [26. AF Fine Adjustment]

screen.

295

11

296

Resetting the Menus

Resetting the Rec. Mode/Playback/Set-up Menus

Settings in the [

A

Rec. Mode] menu, [

Q

Playback] menu, [

R

Set-up] menu, direct keys and playback mode palette can be reset to default settings.

Language/ u , Date Adjustment, the city and DST settings for World Time,

Text Size, Video Output, Copyright Information and [

A

Custom Setting] menu settings are not reset.

[Reset] cannot be selected when the mode dial is set to

A

.

1

Select [Reset] in the [

R

Set-up 3] menu and press the fourway controller (

5

).

The [Reset] screen appears.

2

Press the four-way controller (

2

) to select [Reset] and press the

4

button.

The settings are reset, and the screen that was displayed before selecting the menu appears again.

Resetting the Custom Menu

11

Reset settings in [

A

Custom Setting] menu to default values.

1

Select [Reset Custom Functions] in the [

A

Custom

Setting 4] menu and press the four-way controller (

5

).

The [Reset Custom Functions] screen appears.

2

Press the four-way controller (

2

) to select [Reset] and press the

4

button.

The settings are reset, and the screen that was displayed before selecting the menu appears again.

Functions Available with Various

Lens Combinations

297

All camera capture modes are available when DA, DA L, or FA J lens is used, or when a lens with an s

(Auto) position is used with the aperture ring set to the s

position.

When they are used in a position other than s , or other lenses are used, the following restrictions apply.

z

: Functions are available when the aperture ring is set to the s

position.

# : Some functions are restricted.

×

: Functions are unavailable.

Lens

[Mount type]

DA

DA L

D FA

[K

AF

]

[K

AF2

]

[K

AF3

]

Function

Autofocus

(Lens only)

(With AF adapter 1.7×)

*1

Manual focus

(With the focus indicator)

*2

(With matte field)

Quick-Shift Focus System

Eleven AF points/Five AF points

Multi-segment metering e

/

K

/ b

/ c

/

L

mode a mode

P-TTL Auto Flash

*3

Power Zoom

Automatically obtaining the lens focal length information when using the

Shake Reduction function

Lens Correction function z

– z z

*5

z z

#

*4

z z z z z

–

FA J

FA

*6

[K

AF

]

[K

AF2

] z

– z z

× z z z z z

z

*7

z

F

*6

[K

AF

] [K

A

] z

–

A

–

#

*9

M

P

[K]

–

#

z z z z z z

× × z z z

×

#

*9

× z

× z

#

*10

z z

– z z z

–

×

#

×

–

×

×

*8

× × ×

*1 Lenses with a maximum aperture of F2.8 or faster. Only available at the s position.

*2 Lenses with a maximum aperture of F5.6 or faster.

*3 When using the built-in flash, AF540FGZ, AF360FGZ, AF200FG and/or AF160FC.

*4 Only available with compatible lenses.

*9

11

298

*5 The [Distortion Correction] setting is disabled when using the DA 10-17mm FISH-EYE lens.

*6 To use an FA SOFT 28mm F2.8 lens, FA SOFT 85mm F2.8 lens, or F SOFT 85mm F2.8

lens, set [27. Using Aperture Ring] to [Permitted] in the [

A

Custom Setting 4] menu.

Pictures can be taken with the aperture you set, but only within manual aperture range.

*7 Only available with K

AF2

mount FA lenses.

*8 Only available with an FA 31mm F1.8 Limited, FA 43mm F1.9 Limited, or FA 77mm F1.8

Limited lens.

*9 The focusing area is fixed to

U

(Center).

*10 c (Aperture Priority Automatic Exposure) mode with the aperture set wide open.

(Adjusting the aperture ring has no effect on the actual aperture value.)

Lens Names and Mount Names

DA lenses with a motor and FA zoom lenses with a power zoom function use the K

AF2

mount. DA lenses with a motor and no AF coupler use the

K

AF3

mount.

FA single focal length lenses (non-zoom lenses), DA or DA L lenses without a motor and D FA, FA J and F lenses use the K

AF

mount.

Refer to respective lens manuals for details.

Lenses and Accessories that Cannot be Used with this Camera

When the aperture ring is set to other than the s

(Auto) position or a lens without an s

position or accessories such as an auto extension tube or

auto bellows are used, the camera will not operate unless [27. Using

Aperture Ring] is set to [Permitted] in the [

A

Custom Setting 4] menu.

Refer to “Using the Aperture Ring” (p.299) for restrictions that apply.

Lens and Built-in Flash

11

The built-in flash cannot be regulated and fully discharges when the aperture ring is set to other than the s

(Auto) position, pre A lenses or soft focus lenses are used.

Note that the built-in flash cannot be used as an Auto Flash.

299

Using the Aperture Ring

The shutter can be released even if the aperture ring of the D FA, FA, F or A lens is not set to the s position or a lens without an s

position is attached.

Select [Permitted] in [27. Using Aperture

Ring] of the [

A

Custom Setting 4] menu.

The following restrictions apply depending on the lens being used.

27.

Using Aperture Ring

1

2

Prohibited

Permitted

Shutter will release when aperture ring is not set to the

"A" position

MENU Cancel OK OK

Lens Used

D FA, FA, F, A, M (lens only or with auto diaphragm accessories such as auto extension tube K)

D FA, FA, F, A, M, S (with diaphragm accessories such as extension tube K)

Manual diaphragm lens such as reflex lens (lens only)

Exposure

Mode c

Restriction

The aperture remains open regardless of the aperture ring position. The shutter speed changes in relation to the open aperture but an exposure deviation may occur. [F--] appears for the aperture indicator. c c

Pictures can be taken with a set aperture value but an exposure deviation may occur. [F--] appears for the aperture indicator.

FA SOFT 28mm,

FA SOFT 85mm,

F SOFT 85mm

(lens only)

All lenses c a

Pictures can be taken with a set aperture value in the manual aperture range. [F--] appears for the aperture indicator.

The exposure can be checked with

Optical Preview.

Pictures can be taken with a set aperture value and shutter speed. [F--] appears for the aperture indicator.

The exposure can be checked with

Optical Preview.

11

The camera operates in c

(Aperture Priority Automatic Exposure) mode even if the mode dial is at

B

, e ,

K

, b or

L

when the aperture ring is set to other than the s

position.

300

Cleaning the CMOS Sensor

If the CMOS sensor becomes dirty or dusty, shadows may appear in the image in certain situations such as when shooting against a white background. This indicates that the CMOS sensor must be cleaned.

Removing Dust with Ultrasonic Vibrations

(Dust Removal)

Dust adhering to the CMOS sensor is removed by applying ultrasonic vibrations to the filter on the front surface of the CMOS sensor.

1

Select [Dust Removal] in the [

R

Set-up 4] menu and press the four-way controller (

5

).

The [Dust Removal] screen appears.

2

Press the

4

button.

The Dust Removal function is activated.

Set [Start-up Action] to O (On) to turn the

Dust Removal function on every time the camera is turned on.

When Dust Removal is completed, the camera returns to the [

R

Set-up 4] menu.

Dust Removal

Dust Removal

Start-up Action

MENU OK

Start

11

Detecting Dust on the CMOS Sensor

(Dust Alert)

Dust Alert is a function that detects dust adhering to the CMOS sensor and visually displays the location of the dust.

You can save an image indicating the dust location and display it when

performing sensor cleaning (p.303).

The following conditions must be met before using the Dust Alert function:

- A DA, DA L, FA J lens or a D FA, FA or F lens that has an s

(Auto) position is attached.

- The aperture is set to the s

position when using a lens with an aperture ring.

- The mode dial is set to any mode other than

C

(Movie).

- The focus mode switch is set to l or

A

.

• The exposure time may be extremely long when using the Dust Alert function. Note that if the direction of the lens is changed before processing is complete, dust will not be detected properly.

• Depending on the subject conditions or temperature, dust may not be detected properly.

• The Dust Alert image can only be displayed during sensor cleaning within 30 minutes from the time the image is saved. If more than 30 minutes elapse, save a new Dust Alert image and then perform sensor cleaning.

• The saved Dust Alert image cannot be displayed in Playback mode.

• The Dust Alert image is saved only when an SD Memory Card is inserted.

1

Select [Dust Alert] in the [

R

Set-up 4] menu and press the four-way controller (

5

).

The [Dust Alert] screen appears.

301

11

302

2

Fully display a white wall or other bright subject with no detail in the viewfinder and press the shutter release button fully.

Dust Alert

Checks for dust on the sensor.

Press shutter release button to reveal dust location

After image processing is performed, the

Dust Alert image appears.

If the message [The operation could not be completed correctly] is displayed,

MENU

press the 4 button and take another picture.

3

Check the sensor for dust.

SHUTTER Check

11

OK

Available operations

Rear e-dial (

S

) Displays the Dust Alert image at full screen display.

4

Press the

4

button.

The Dust Alert image is saved and the camera returns to the [

R

Set-up

4] menu.

Regardless of the camera settings, the Dust Alert image will be taken with specific shooting conditions.

303

Removing Dust with a Blower

Raise the mirror up and open the shutter when cleaning the CMOS sensor with a blower.

Please contact a PENTAX Service Center for professional cleaning because the CMOS sensor is a precision part. Cleaning services involve a fee.

You can use the optional Imagesensor Cleaning kit O-ICK1 when cleaning the CMOS sensor.

• Do not use a spray type blower.

• Do not perform Sensor Cleaning during Bulb shooting. The shutter may accidentally close and may cause damage to the camera’s internal parts.

• To prevent dirt and dust from accumulating on the CMOS sensor, keep the lens mount cap on the camera when a lens is not attached.

• When the battery level is low, the message [Not enough battery power remaining to clean sensor] is displayed on the monitor.

• It is recommended to use the AC adapter kit (optional) when cleaning the sensor. If you are not using the AC adapter kit, please install the battery with ample capacity remaining. If the battery capacity becomes low during cleaning, a warning beep will sound. In this case, stop cleaning immediately.

• Do not put the tip of the blower inside the lens mount area. If the power is turned off, this may cause damage to the shutter, CMOS sensor and the mirror.

• The self-timer lamp blinks, and [ d

] and [

Cln

] appear on the LCD panel while cleaning the sensor.

• This camera may generate a vibration sound while cleaning the CMOS sensor. It is not a malfunction.

1

Turn the camera off and remove the lens.

2

Turn the camera on.

3

Select [Sensor Cleaning] in the [

R

Set-up 4] menu and press the four-way controller (

5

).

The [Sensor Cleaning] screen appears.

11

304

4

Press the four-way controller ( to select [Mirror Up] and press

2

) the

4

button.

The mirror is locked in the up position.

If you used Dust Alert to detect dust on the sensor within the last 30 minutes, the

Dust Alert image appears on the monitor.

Clean the sensor while checking the location of the dust.

5

Clean the CMOS sensor.

Use a brush-less blower to remove dirt and dust from the CMOS sensor. Using a blower with a brush may scratch the

CMOS sensor. Do not wipe the CMOS sensor with a cloth.

Sensor Cleaning

Raises mirror and opens shutter for access to clean sensor.

Turn the power off to finish

Mirror Up

Cancel

OK OK

6

Turn off the camera.

The mirror automatically returns to its original position.

7

Attach the lens or body mount cover.

11

Using the GPS Unit

305

The following functions are available when the optional GPS unit O-GPS1 is attached to this camera.

Electronic Compass

Displays the latitude, longitude, altitude of the current location, lens direction and

Coordinated Universal

Time (UTC).

N 36°45.410'

W140°02.000'

0°

89m

Simple Navigation

ASTROTRACER

Auto Time Synch.

10/10/2012 10:00:00

Displays the direction and distance from the current location, based on the latitude and longitude of the set destination. You can save the GPS location information stored in a captured image as the destination or load the destination from a location information file created on a computer.

(p.306)

NewYork

0°

Current Location

N 36°45.410'

W140°02.000'

89m

Direction of Destination

Distance to Destination

10/10/2012

270°

10000km

10:00:00

Tracks and captures celestial bodies. By matching the movement of the camera’s built-in shake reduction unit with the movement of celestial bodies, celestial bodies can be captured as individual points even when shooting

with a long exposure setting. (p.308)

Automatically adjusts the camera’s date and time settings using information acquired from GPS satellites.

• Refer to the manual of the GPS unit for details on how to attach the unit and information on the unit’s functions.

• If [GPS] is assigned to the

V

/

Y

button, you can display the Electronic

Compass, Simple Navigation, or ASTROTRACER screen by pressing the

V

/

Y

button. (p.249)

11

306

Displaying the Distance and Direction to the

Destination (Simple Navigation)

Saving the Destination

You can save the GPS location information stored in an image as the destination for Simple Navigation. Up to 38 destinations can be saved.

11

1

Press the four-way controller (

3

) in Playback mode.

The playback mode palette appears.

2

Use the four-way controller (

2345

) to select

U

(Save

Destination) and press the

4

button.

The screen to select an image appears and the GPS location information stored in the image is displayed.

If there are no images that have GPS location information stored, [No image can be processed] appears.

3

Use the four-way controller (

45

) to select the image with the GPS location information you want to set as a destination, and press the

4

button.

N 36°45.410'

W140°02.000'

The [Destination Name] screen appears.

MENU

Cancel

OK

OK

4

Enter the name of the destination to save.

Enter the name in the same way as [Copyright Information]. Refer to Step

4 on p.269.

Up to 18 single-byte characters can be entered.

When the name is set, the screen to save the destination data in the destination list appears.

5

Use the four-way controller ( the destination list to save.

23

) to select the desired position in

Turn the rear e-dial (

S

) to switch between pages.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Madrid

London

Paris

Amsterdom

Milan

Select desired position in destination list

MENU

Cancel

OK

OK

6

Press the

4

button.

The save confirmation screen appears.

7

Use the four-way controller (

23

) to select [Save] and press the

4

button.

5/38

The screen that was displayed in Step 3 appears again.

Repeat Steps 3 to 7 to save other images.

8

Press the

3

button twice.

Destination list data can be stored on an SD Memory Card. The stored destination list files can also be edited on a computer. Refer to the manual of the GPS unit for details.

307

Starting the Navigation

1

Select [GPS] in the [

A

Rec. Mode 4] menu and press the four-way controller (

5

).

The [GPS] screen appears.

2

Use the four-way controller (

23

) to select [Simple Navigation] and press the four-way controller

(

5

).

The [Simple Navigation] screen appears.

GPS

Electronic Compass

Simple Navigation

ASTROTRACER (Bulb)

Calibration

Positioning Interval

Auto Time Synch.

1min.

MENU

11

308

3

Use the four-way controller (

23

) to select [Select Destination] and press the four-way controller

(

5

).

Simple Navigation

Navigation Start

Select Destination

NewYork

The destination selection screen appears.

Destination Manager

MENU

4

Use the four-way controller (

23

) to select a destination.

Turn the rear e-dial (

S

) to switch between pages.

5

Press the

4

button.

The screen that was displayed in Step 3 appears again.

6

Use the four-way controller (

23

) to select [Navigation

Start] and press the

4

button.

The current latitude, longitude, altitude, direction of the destination, distance to the destination, and Coordinated Universal Time (UTC) are displayed.

Press the shutter release button halfway to switch the camera to Capture mode.

Shooting Celestial Bodies (ASTROTRACER)

11

1

Set the mode dial to

p

.

2

Select [GPS] in the [

A

Rec. Mode 4] menu and press the four-way controller (

5

).

The [GPS] screen appears.

3

Select [ASTROTRACER (Bulb)] and press the four-way controller (

5

).

The [ASTROTRACER (Bulb)] screen appears.

4

To set the desired exposure time, first set [Timed Exposure] to

O

(On).

ASTROTRACER (Bulb)

Max. Trace Duration

5' 00"

You can set the exposure time between

0'01" and 5'00" in [Exposure Time

Preset].

Start Shooting

Timed Exposure

Exposure Time Preset

Precise Calibration

MENU

Cancel

5

Use the four-way controller (

23

) to select [Start

Shooting] and press the

4

button.

5' 00"

OK

OK

6

Press the shutter release button fully.

Shooting starts.

7

Press the shutter release button fully again.

Exposure ends.

When [Timed Exposure] is enabled, shooting ends automatically after the set time has elapsed.

309

11

310

Error Messages

11

Error message

Memory card full

No image

This image cannot be displayed

No card in the camera

Cannot use this card

Memory card error

Card is not formatted

Card is locked

The card is electronically locked

This image cannot be enlarged

This image is protected

Description

The SD Memory Card is full and no more images can be saved. Insert a new SD Memory

Card or delete unwanted images. (p.54, p.74)

Data may be saved when you perform the following operations.

• Change the file format to JPEG. (p.180)

• Change the JPEG Recorded Pixels or JPEG

Quality setting. (p.178, p.179)

There are no images that can be played back on the SD Memory Card.

You are trying to play back an image in a format not supported by this camera. You may be able to play it back on another brand of camera or your computer.

The SD Memory Card is not inserted in the

camera. (p.54)

The inserted SD Memory Card is not compatible with this camera.

The SD Memory Card has a problem, and image capture and playback are impossible. It may be viewable on a computer but not with this camera.

The SD Memory Card you have inserted is unformatted or has been formatted on another device and is not compatible with this camera.

Use the card after formatting it with this camera.

(p.246)

The write-protect switch on an SD Memory

Card you have inserted is locked. Unlock the

SD Memory Card. (p.6)

Data is protected by an SD Memory Card security feature.

You are trying to enlarge an image that cannot be enlarged.

You are trying to delete an image that is protected. Remove protection from the image.

(p.222)

311

Error message

Battery depleted

Not enough battery power remaining to clean sensor

Not enough battery power remaining to activate Pixel Mapping

Image folder cannot be created

Unable to store image

Settings not stored

The operation could not be completed correctly

No more images can be selected

No image can be processed

This image cannot be processed

The camera failed to create an image

Camera overheated.

Disabling Live View temporarily to protect circuitry

Description

The battery is exhausted. Install a fully charged

battery in the camera. (p.49)

Appears during sensor cleaning if the battery level is insufficient. Install a fully charged battery or use an AC adapter kit (optional).

(p.52)

Appears during pixel mapping if the battery level is insufficient. Install a fully charged battery or use an AC adapter kit (optional).

(p.52)

The maximum folder number (999) and file number (9999) are being used, and no more images can be saved. Insert a new SD Memory

Card or format the card. (p.246)

The image could not be saved because of an

SD Memory Card error.

The DPOF settings could not be saved because the SD Memory Card is full. Delete unwanted

images and perform DPOF setting again. (p.74)

The camera was unable to measure the manual

white balance (p.185) or detect dust on the

sensor (p.301). Try the operation again.

You cannot select more than the maximum

number of images for Index (p.215), Select &

Delete (p.220), Developing Multiple RAW

Images (p.240) and DPOF (p.271).

There are no images that can be processed

using Digital Filter (p.233) or RAW

Development (p.238).

Appears when you try to perform Save as

Manual WB (p.187), Resize (p.230), Cropping

(p.231), Digital Filter (p.233), or RAW

Development (p.238) for images captured with

other cameras, or when you try to perform

Resize or Cropping for minimum file size images.

The creation of an index print image failed.

(p.215)

Live View cannot be used because the camera’s internal temperature is too high.

Press the 4 button and try using Live View again when the camera has cooled down.

11

312

Error message

Cannot start Live View

This function is not available in the current mode

Description

Appears if Live View is started when [27. Using

Aperture Ring] is set to [Prohibited] in the [

A

Custom Setting 4] menu and the lens aperture ring is set to a position other than s

, or a lens without an s

position is being used.

You are trying to set a function that is not available when the exposure mode is set to

B

(Green) or

C

(Movie).

11

Troubleshooting

313

In rare cases, the camera may not operate correctly due to static electricity. This can be remedied by taking the battery out and putting it back in again. When the mirror remains in the up position, take the battery out and put it back in again. Then, the mirror will retract when the camera is turned on again. After these procedures are done, if the camera operates correctly, it does not require any repairs.

We recommend checking the following items before contacting a service center.

The camera does not turn on

Problem

The shutter cannot be released

Autofocus does not work

The battery is not installed

The battery power is low

Cause

The lens aperture ring is set to other than the s

position

Remedy

Check if a battery is installed. If not, install a fully charged battery.

Replace with a fully charged battery or use

the AC adapter kit (optional). (p.52)

Set the lens aperture ring to the s

position

or select [Permitted] in [27. Using Aperture

Ring] of the [

A

Custom Setting 4] menu.

(p.89, p.299)

The built-in flash is charging

There is no available space on the SD

Memory Card

Recording

Wait until charging is finished.

The subject is difficult to focus on

The subject is not in the focusing area

The subject is too close

Insert an SD Memory Card with available

space or delete unwanted images. (p.54, p.74)

Wait until recording is finished.

Autofocus cannot focus well on subjects that have low contrast (the sky, white walls, etc.), dark colors, intricate designs, rapidlymoving objects or scenery shot through a window or a net-like pattern. Lock focus on another object located at the same distance as your subject, then aim at the target and press the shutter release button fully.

Alternatively, use manual focus. (p.116)

Position the subject in the focus frame in the middle of the viewfinder. If the subject is outside the focusing area, aim the camera at the subject and lock the focus, then compose a picture and press the shutter release button fully.

Move away from the subject and take a picture.

11

314

11

Problem

Autofocus does not work

The focus cannot be locked

The AE Lock function does not operate

The built-in flash does not discharge

The exposure mode is set to

B

, p

or

M

mode

The exposure mode is set to

B mode

Cause

The focus mode is set to

\

The focus mode is set to k

Remedy

Set the focus mode switch to l

or

A

.

(p.108)

Autofocus is not locked (focus lock) when the focus mode is set to k

(

A

). The camera will continue focusing on the subject while the shutter release button is pressed halfway. If there is a subject that you wish to focus on, slide the focus mode switch to l

and use the focus lock. (p.108)

Set the exposure mode to any mode other than

B

(Green), p (Bulb Exposure) or

M

(Flash X-sync Speed).

Only

C

(Auto Flash Discharge) and

D

(Auto Flash+Red-eye Reduction) are available for the flash mode when the exposure mode is

B

(Green). The flash will not discharge when the subject is bright in these modes. In the exposure modes other than

B

, only the flash mode that discharges every time the flash recharges is available. Try different exposure modes.

The USB connection with a computer does not work properly

The USB connection mode is set to [PTP]

The Shake

Reduction function is off

[

Set [USB Connection] to [MSC] in the [

Set-up 2] menu. (p.279)

Set [Shake Reduction] to

A k

(On) in the

Rec. Mode 4] menu. (p.122)

R

Shake

Reduction does not work

The Shake

Reduction function is not set properly

Shutter speed is too low for the Shake

Reduction function to be effective when panning or shooting night scenes, etc.

The subject is too close

If a lens for which the focal length information cannot be obtained is used, set the focal length in the [Input Focal Length]

screen. (p.124)

Turn off the Shake Reduction function and use a tripod.

Move away from the subject, or turn off the

Shake Reduction function and use a tripod.

Main Specifications

315

Model Description

Type

Lens Mount

Compatible Lens

TTL autofocus, auto-exposure SLR digital-still camera with built-in retractable P-TTL flash

PENTAX K

AF2

bayonet mount (AF coupler, lens information contacts, K-mount with power contacts)

K

AF3

, K

AF2

(power zoom compatible), K

AF

, K

A

mount lenses

Image Capture Unit

Image Sensor

Effective Pixels

Total Pixels

Dust Removal

Sensitivity (Standard

Output)

Image Stabilizer

Primary color filter, CMOS, Size: 23.7 x 15.7 (mm)

Approx. 16.28 megapixels

Approx. 16.93 megapixels

Image sensor cleaning using ultrasonic vibrations “DR II” with the Dust Alert function

AUTO: 100 to 12800 (EV steps can be set to 1 EV, 1/2 EV or 1/3

EV), expandable to ISO 80 - 51200.

Sensor-shift Shake Reduction

File Formats

File Formats

Recorded Pixels

Quality Level

Color Space

Storage Medium

Storage Folder

RAW (PEF/DNG), JPEG (Exif 2.30), DCF 2.0 compliant

JPEG: p

(4928×3264 pixels),

J

(3936×2624 pixels),

P

(3072×2048 pixels), i

(1728×1152 pixels)

RAW: p

(4928×3264 pixels)

RAW (14bit): PEF, DNG JPEG:

Z

(Premium), C

(Best), D (Better), E (Good), RAW + JPEG simultaneous capturing compatible sRGB, AdobeRGB

SD, SDHC, and SDXC Memory Cards

Date (100_1018,101_1019...)/

PENTX (100PENTX, 101PENTX...)

Viewfinder

Type

Coverage (FOV)

Magnification

Pentaprism Finder

Approx. 100%

Approx. 0.92× (50 mm F1.4 •

∞

)

Eye-Relief Length

Approx. 21.7 mm (from the view window), Approx. 24.5 mm

(from the center of lens)

Diopter Adjustment Approx. -2.5 to +1.5m

-1

Focusing Screen Interchangeable Natural-Bright-Matte III focusing screen

11

316

Live View

Type

Focusing Mechanism

Display

TTL method using CMOS image sensor

Contrast detection + Face detection, Contrast detection, Phase matching

Field of View approx. 100%, Magnified view ( = mode: 2×, 4×,

6×/ \ mode: 2×, 4×, 6×, 8×, 10×), Grid display (4×4 Grid, Golden

Section, Scale display), Bright/dark area warning, Histogram

LCD Monitor

Type

Size

Dots

Adjustment

Preview

Type

White Balance

Auto

Wide viewing angle TFT color LCD with AR coating and air gapless glass

3.0 inches

Approx. 921,000 dots

Brightness and colors adjustable

Optical preview, digital preview

Preset

Manual

Fine Adjustment

Method using a combination of the CMOS sensor and the lightsource detection sensor

Daylight, Shade, Cloudy, Fluorescent Light (

D

: Daylight Color,

N

: Daylight White,

W

: Cool White,

L

: Warm White), Tungsten

Light, Flash, f

, Manual, Color Temperature

Configuration using the display screen (up to 3 settings can be saved), Color Temperature settings (up to 3 settings can be saved), Copying the white balance settings of a captured image

Adjustable ±7 steps on A-B axis and/or G-M axis

11

Autofocus System

Type

Focus Sensor

Brightness Range

AF Mode

AF Point Selection

AF Assist Light

TTL: phase-matching autofocus

SAFOX X, 11 points (9 cross type focus points in the center)

EV -3 to 18 (ISO100, at normal temperature)

Single AF ( l ), Continuous AF ( k )

Focus priority or shutter priority mode for l

Focus priority or FPS priority mode for k

Auto: 5 points, Auto: 11 points, Select (Expanded Area AF is available), Center

Dedicated LED AF assist light

Exposure Control

Type

Metering Range

TTL open aperture, 77 segmented metering, center-weighted and spot metering

EV 0 to 22 (ISO100 50mm F1.4)

Exposure Mode

EV Compensation

AE Lock

Green, Program, Sensitivity Priority, Shutter Priority, Aperture Priority,

Shutter & Aperture Priority, Manual, Bulb, Flash X-sync Speed

±5 EV (1/2 EV steps or 1/3 EV steps can be selected)

Available via dedicated AE Lock button (timer type: two times the meter operating time set in Custom Setting); Continuous as long as the shutter button is halfway pressed.

317

Shutter

Type

Shutter Speed

Electronically controlled vertical-run focal-plane shutter

Auto: 1/8000 to 30 sec., Manual: 1/8000 to 30 sec. (1/3 EV steps or 1/ 2EV steps), Bulb

Drive Modes

Mode Selection

Continuous Shooting

Single frame, Continuous (Hi, Lo), Self-timer (12s, 2s), Remote

Control (immediately, 3 sec., continuous), Auto Bracketing (2, 3 or

5 frames), Auto Bracketing + Self-timer, Auto Bracketing +

Remote Control, Mirror Lock-up, Mirror Lock-up + Remote Control

Max. approx. 7.0 fps, JPEG ( p

•

C

•Continuous Hi): up to approx. 30 frames, RAW: up to approx. 20 frames

Max. approx. 1.6 fps, JPEG ( p

•

C

•Continuous Lo): until

SD Memory Card is full, RAW: up to approx. 40 frames

Flash

Built-in Flash

Flash Mode

Sync Speed

Flash Exposure

Compensation

Built-in retractable P-TTL pop-up flash, GN: approx. 13 (ISO100/m)

Angle of view: equivalent to angle of view of 28mm lens (35mm format equivalent)

P-TTL, Red-eye Reduction, Slow-speed Sync, Trailing Curtain

Sync; High-Speed Sync and Wireless Sync are available with

PENTAX dedicated external flash.

1/180 sec.

-2.0 to +1.0 EV

Capture Functions

Custom Image

Bright, Natural, Portrait, Landscape, Vibrant, Muted, Bleach

Bypass, Reversal Film, Monochrome

Noise Reduction Slow Shutter Speed NR, High-ISO NR

Dynamic Range Setting Highlight Correction, Shadow Correction

Lens Correction

Cross Processing

Digital Filter

HDR Capture

Distortion Correction, Lateral Chromatic Aberration Correction

Random, Preset 1-3, Favorite 1-3

Toy Camera, Retro, High Contrast, Extract Color, Soft,

Starburst, Fish-eye, Custom Filter

Auto, Standard, Strong 1, Strong 2, Strong 3

Auto Align (automatic composition correction)

11

318

Multi-exposure

Interval Shooting

Electronic Level

Select the number of shots between 2 and 9.

Exposure adjusted automatically. (Auto EV Adjustment)

Capture Interval setting (1 sec. to 24 hr.), Start Interval setting

(immediate, designated time), Captures up to 999 images

Extended Bracketing

White Balance, Saturation, Hue, High/Low Key Adj, Contrast,

Sharpness

Horizon Correction SR On: adjusts up to 1 degree, SR Off: adjusts up to 2 degrees

Composition

Adjustment

Adjustment range of ±1.5 mm up, down, left or right (±1 mm when rotated); rotating range of ±1 degree

Displayed on LCD panel or in viewfinder (horizontal direction only); displayed on monitor (horizontal direction and vertical direction)

Movie

File Format

Recorded Pixels

Quality Level

Sound

Recording Time

Custom Image

Cross Processing

Digital Filter

Motion JPEG (AVI) a

(1920×1080, 16:9, 25 fps), b

(1280×720, 16:9, 30 fps/

25 fps), c

(640×480, 4:3, 30 fps/25 fps)

C

(Best),

D

(Better),

E

(Good)

Built-in monaural microphone, external stereo microphone terminal

Up to 25 minutes; automatically stops recording if the internal temperature of the camera becomes high.

Bright, Natural, Portrait, Landscape, Vibrant, Muted, Bleach

Bypass, Reversal Film, Monochrome

Random, Preset 1-3, Favorite 1-3

Toy Camera, Retro, High Contrast, Extract Color, Color

11

Playback Functions

Playback View

Delete

Digital Filter

RAW Development

Single frame, multi-image display (4, 9, 16, 36, 81 segmentation), display magnification (up to 32x, scrolling and quick magnification available), rotating, histogram (Y histogram, RGB histogram), bright/dark area warning, auto image rotation, detailed information display, copyright information display (photographer, copyright holder), GPS data

(latitude, longitude, altitude, direction, Coordinated Universal

Time (UTC)), folder display, calendar display, slideshow

Delete single image, delete all, select & delete, delete folder, delete instant review image

Toy Camera, Retro, High Contrast, Sketch Filter, Water Color,

Pastel, Posterization, Miniature, Base Parameter Adjustment,

Monochrome, Color, Extract Color, Soft, Starburst, Fish-eye,

Slim, HDR, Custom Filter

File Format (JPEG, TIFF), Recorded Pixels, Quality Level,

Custom Image, White Balance, Sensitivity, High-ISO NR,

Shadow Correction, Distortion Correction, Lateral Chromatic

Aberration Correction, Color Space

Edit

Resize, Cropping (aspect ratio can be changed, and tilt correction is available), Index, Movie Edit (Divide or delete selected frames), Capturing a JPEG still picture from a movie,

Saving RAW data from JPEG (if available in buffer memory)

319

Customization

User Mode

Custom Functions

Mode Memory

Up to 5 settings can be saved.

27 items

13 items

E-Dial Programming Electronic dials (front/rear): customizable to each exposure mode.

Custom Button

|

/

Y

button (One Push File Format, Exposure Bracketing,

Digital Preview, Electronic Level, Composition Adjustment, GPS)

= button (Enable AF, Cancel AF)

Text Size

World Time

Standard, Large

World Time settings for 75 cities (28 time zones)

AF Fine Adjustment ±10 steps, adjustment for all lenses or individual lenses (up to 20 can be saved)

Copyright Information

Names of “Photographer” and “Copyright Holder” are embedded to the image file.

Revision history can be checked using the provided software.

Power Supply

Battery Type

AC Adapter

Battery Life

Rechargeable Lithium-ion Battery D-LI90

AC Adapter kit K-AC132 (optional)

Number of recordable images (with 50% flash usage): approx.

740 images,

(without flash usage): approx. 980 images

Playback time: approx. 440 minutes

* Tested in compliance with CIPA standard using a new rechargeable lithium-ion battery under the temperature of

23°C. Actual results may vary depending on the shooting conditions/circumstances.

Interfaces

Connection Port

USB 2.0 (high-speed compatible)/AV output, DC input, Cable switch, X-sync socket, HDMI output, Stereo microphone

USB Connection MSC/PTP

Video Output Format NTSC/PAL

11

Dimensions and Weight

Dimensions

Approx. 131 mm (W) × 97 mm (H) × 72.5 mm (D) (excluding protrusions)

Weight

Approx. 680 g (body only), Approx. 760 g (including dedicated battery and SD Memory Card)

320

Accessories

Package Contents

Software

USB Cable I-USB7, AV Cable I-AVC7, Strap O-ST132, ME

Viewfinder Cap, Rechargeable Lithium-ion Battery D-LI90,

Battery Charger D-BC90, AC plug cord, Software (CD-ROM)

S-SW132

<Mounted on the camera> Eyecup F

R

, Hot shoe cover F

K

, Body mount cover, Sync socket 2P cap

PENTAX Digital Camera Utility 4

Approximate Image Storage Capacity and Playback Time

When using the fully charged battery

Battery

D-LI90

(Temperature)

(23°C)

( 0°C)

Normal

Recording

980

810

Flash Photography

50% Use 100% Use

740

680

610

560

Playback Time

440 minutes

400 minutes

The image storage capacity (normal recording and flash use 50%) is based on measuring conditions in accordance with CIPA standards, while other data is based on our measuring conditions. Some deviation from the above figures may occur in actual use depending on the selected capture mode and shooting conditions.

Approximate Image Storage Capacity by Size

When using a 2 GB SD Memory Card

11

JPEG Quality

Recorded Pixels

C

214

332

543

1617

D

379

585

945

2793

E

749

1138

1807

5121

RAW p

(4928×3264)

J

(3936×2624)

P

(3072×2048) i

(1728×1152)

Z

134

208

339

1041

58

—

—

—

The number of storable images may vary depending on the subject, shooting conditions, selected capture mode and SD Memory Card, etc.

Index

321

Symbols

m

(EV Compensation) button

.................................21, 24, 105

E

(Flash pop-up) button

.........................................22, 72

Q

(Playback) button

...................................22, 24, 73

|

(Green) button .............22, 24

i (Delete) button .............24, 74

[

A

Rec. Mode] Menu .....79, 288

[

Q

Playback] Menu ....209, 292

[

R

Set-up] Menu ..........244, 293

[

A

Custom Setting] Menu

.......................................81, 294

B

(Green) mode .............66, 90

| (Preview) .........................118

A

AC adapter .............................52

Adding the date ....................272

AdobeRGB ...........................189

AE Lock ........................107, 115

AE Metering .........................103

L

button ....22, 24, 100, 107

AF Assist Light .........20, 67, 109

= (Autofocus) ....................108

=

button ..............22, 110, 250

AF coupler ..............................20

AF Fine Adjustment ..............111

AF frame ................................67

AF point switching dial ...22, 113

Aperture Priority Automatic

Exposure Mode c

................95

Aperture ring ..........................89

Aspect Ratio .................152, 231

ASTROTRACER ..................308

Auto Bracketing ....................138

Auto Image Rotation ............210

Auto Power Off ..................... 266

Auto Screen Rotation ........... 259

Auto Time Synch. ................. 305

F (White Balance) ......... 183

Autofocus = ...................... 108

Autofocus Method ................ 147

Automatic sensitivity correction

............................................... 84

c

(Aperture Priority Automatic

Exposure) mode ..................... 95

AV cable ............................... 224

AV device ............................. 224

B

p

(Bulb Exposure) mode ..... 101

Base Parameter Adj (Digital

Filter) .................................... 233

Battery .................................... 49

Battery grip contacts .............. 20

Beep ..................................... 252

Bleach Bypass (Custom Image)

............................................. 197

Bright (Custom Image) ......... 197

Bright portions ...................... 190

Bright/Dark Area warning

............................. 148, 210, 260

Brightness adjustment ......... 190

Brightness Level .................. 260

Brightness of the monitor ..... 260

Built-in flash ........................... 69

Bulb Exposure mode p ....... 101

Button Customization ........... 249

C

Cable release terminal ........... 20

Cable switch ......................... 102

Calendar display .................. 214

Card access lamp .................. 20

11

322

11

Catch-in Focus .....................117

Center-weighted metering ....103

Charging the battery ...............49

City names ...........................255

Cloudy (White Balance) .......183

Color (Digital Filter) ......144, 234

Color of the monitor ..............261

Color Space .........................189

Color Temperature ...............188

Composition Adjustment ......195

Computer .............................277

Continuous mode .................109

Continuous Shooting ............132

Contrast (Custom Image) .....198

Contrast AF ..........................147

Contrast-Control-Sync mode

(Flash) ..................................174

Control panel ....................28, 41

Copyright Holder ..................269

Creating folders ....................263

Cropping ...............................231

Cross Processing .................200

f

(White Balance) ...........183

Custom Filter (Digital Filter)

.....................................144, 234

Custom Image ......................197

[

A

Custom Setting] Menu

.......................................81, 294

Customizing buttons and dials

.............................................247

D

Dark portions ........................190

Date Adjustment .............62, 253

Daylight (White Balance) ......183

DC input terminal ...................53

Default settings ....................288

Delete .............................74, 220

Delete all images ..................222

i

(Delete) button .............24, 74

Delete folder .........................221

Deleting a single image .......... 74

Destination ........................... 253

Detailed information display

............................................... 31

Developing RAW images ..... 238

Digital Filter .................. 143, 233

Digital Preview ..................... 120

Diopter adjustment ................. 58

Direct keys ............... 40, 78, 288

Display Color ........................ 259

Display language ................. 256

Displaying multiple images

............................................. 212

Distortion .............................. 193

DNG ..................................... 181

DPOF ................................... 271

D-Range Setting .................. 190

Drive Mode ............................. 78

DST ...................................... 254

Dust Alert ............................. 301

Dust Removal ...................... 300

Dynamic Range ................... 190

E

E-Dial Programming ............. 247

E-dials .................................. 247

Electronic Compass ............. 305

Electronic Level ........ 29, 39, 262

Enlarge Instant Review ........ 260

Enlarging images ................. 211

Error message ..................... 310

EV Compensation ................ 105

m

(EV Compensation) button

................................. 21, 24, 105

EV Steps .............................. 106

Exif ....................................... 269

Expanded Area AF ............... 115

Exposure ................................ 83

Exposure Bracketing ............ 138

Exposure Mode ................ 45, 88

Exposure warning ...... 95, 96, 98

Extended Bracketing ............141

External flash .......................167

Extract Color (Digital Filter)

.....................................143, 234

Eyecup ...................................58

F

Face Detection AF ...............147

File Format ...........................180

File Name .............................264

File number ..........................265

Filter .............................143, 233

Filter Effect (Custom Image)

.............................................199

Fish-eye (Digital Filter)

.....................................143, 234

Flash ..............................69, 161

Flash (White Balance) ..........183

Flash Exposure Compensation

...............................................71

E

(Flash pop-up) button

.........................................22, 72

Flash X-sync Speed mode

M

.............................................102

Fluorescent Light (White

Balance) ...............................183

Focus indicator ...............67, 116

Focus lock ..............................67

Focus Mode .........................108

Focus mode switch ........22, 108

Focus point ...........................113

Focusing ...............................108

Folder display .......................213

Folder Name ........................263

Format ..................................246

Four-way controller ( 2345 )

.........................................23, 24

Frame rate ............................152

Front e-dial .......................21, 24

G

GPS unit ...............................305

323

Green button .................... 22, 24

Green mode

B

............... 66, 90

Guide Display ................. 25, 257

Guide indicator ....................... 35

Guide number ...................... 165

H

HDMI Out ............................. 227

HDMI terminal ...................... 226

HDR (Digital Filter) ............... 234

HDR Capture ....................... 191

Help ...................................... 285

High Contrast (Digital Filter)

..................................... 143, 233

High dynamic range shooting

............................................. 191

High/Low Key Adjustment

(Custom Image) ................... 198

High-ISO NR .......................... 85

Highlight Correction ............. 190

High-Speed Flash Sync mode

(Flash) .................................. 169

Histogram ............... 33, 148, 260

Hometown ...................... 60, 253

Horizon Correction ............... 123

Hot shoe ................................. 20

Hue (Custom Image) ............ 198

I

Image finishing tone ............. 197

Image plane indicator ............. 20

Image Rotation ..................... 219

Image storage capacity ........ 320

Index .................................... 215

M

button

....................... 22, 24, 26, 30, 73

Info Overlay .......................... 148

Initial settings ......................... 60

Initializing ............................. 246

Input Focal Length ............... 124

Installing software ................ 281

Instant Review ............... 67, 259

11

324

11

Interval Shooting ..................133

o

button ........................21, 83

ISO sensitivity ........................83

J

JPEG Quality ........................179

JPEG Recorded Pixels .........178

K

Kelvin ...................................188

L

Landscape (Custom Image)

.............................................197

Language setting ............60, 256

Lateral chromatic aberration

.............................................193

LCD Color Tuning ................261

LCD panel ..............................38

Lens ...............................56, 297

Lens Correction ....................193

Lens information contacts ......20

Lens mount index ...................20

Lens unlock button ...........22, 57

Live View ..............................146

Locking the exposure ...107, 115

U

button .......................22, 149

M

a (Manual Exposure) mode

...............................................98

Macintosh .............................278

Main switch ................21, 24, 59

Manual focus

\

.................116

Matte field .............................117

Memory ................................274

Memory card ..........................54

3

button .............23, 24, 42

Menu operation ......................42

Menu page display ...............258

Meter Operating Time ..........104

Metering mode switch

....................................... 22, 103

\

(Manual focus) .............. 116

Microphone .................... 20, 154

Miniature (Digital Filter) ........ 233

Mired .................................... 188

Mirror ...................................... 20

Mirror Up ...................... 130, 304

Mode dial ......................... 22, 45

Mode dial lock button ............. 22

Monitor ................................... 25

Monochrome (Custom Image)

............................................. 197

Monochrome (Digital Filter)

............................................. 233

Movie ................................... 152

Movie Aperture Control ........ 153

Movie Editing ....................... 159

Movie playback .................... 157

MSC ..................................... 279

Multi-exposure ..................... 136

Multi-image display .............. 212

Multiple flash shooting ......... 173

Multi-segment metering ....... 103

Muted (Custom Image) ........ 197

N

Natural (Custom Image) ....... 197

Noise Reduction ..................... 85

NTSC ................................... 225

O

4

button ........................ 22, 24

One Push File Format .......... 181

Optical Preview .................... 120

P

e (Program Automatic

Exposure) Mode ..................... 91

PAL ...................................... 225

Pastel (Digital Filter) ............. 233

PC/AV terminal ............ 224, 280

PEF ......................................181

PENTAX Digital Camera

Utility 4 .................................281

Phase Difference AF ............147

Photographer information .....269

Pixel Mapping .......................273

Pixels ............................152, 178

Playback .................................73

Q

(Playback) button

...................................22, 24, 73

Playback display ....................30

Playback mode palette

.....................................208, 292

Playback time .......................320

Playing back images continuously .........................217

Portrait (Custom Image) .......197

Posterization (Digital Filter)

.............................................233

Power supply ..........................59

Preview ................................118

Preview Dial .........................250

Printing .................................271

Product registration ..............286

Program Automatic Exposure mode e

..................................91

Program Line ..........................89

Protect ..................................222

Provided software ................281

PTP ......................................279

P-TTL (Flash) .......................168

Q

Quality Level ................152, 179

Quick Zoom ..........................210

R

RAW .....................................180

RAW Development ...............238

RAW File Format ..................181

| /

Y

button .......22, 181, 250

Rear e-dial ........................22, 24

325

Recorded Pixels ........... 152, 178

Remote Control .................... 127

Reset .................................... 296

Resize .................................. 230

Retro (Digital Filter) ...... 143, 233

Reversal Film (Custom Image)

............................................. 197

Rotating images ................... 219

S

Saturation (Custom Image)

............................................. 198

Save as Manual WB ............ 187

Save Destination .................. 306

Save RAW data ............... 33, 74

Save Settings as USER ....... 202

SD Memory Card ................... 54

Select & Delete .................... 220

Select Battery ....................... 267

Self-timer .............................. 125

Sensitivity ............................... 83

Sensitivity Priority Automatic

Exposure mode

K

............... 92

Sensor Cleaning .......... 300, 303

Shade (White Balance) ........ 183

Shadow Correction .............. 190

Shake Reduction .......... 122, 153

Sharpness (Custom Image)

............................................. 198

Shooting celestial bodies ..... 308

Shooting information .............. 26

Show Grid ............................ 148

Shutter & Aperture Priority

Automatic Exposure mode

L

............................................... 97

Shutter Button Half Press .... 251

Shutter Priority Automatic

Exposure mode b

................ 94

Shutter release button

......................................... 21, 24

Simple Navigation ................ 306

11

326

11

Single mode .........................109

Sketch Filter (Digital Filter) ...233

Slideshow .............................217

Slim (Digital Filter) ................234

Slow Shutter Speed NR .........87

Slow-speed Sync .................162

Soft (Digital Filter) ........143, 234

Software ...............................281

Sound ...........................153, 252

Speaker ..................................20

Spot Metering .......................104

sRGB ....................................189

Starburst (Digital Filter)

.....................................143, 234

Status screen .................27, 258

Strap .......................................48

Superimpose AF Area ....37, 113

K

(Sensitivity Priority Automatic

Exposure) mode .....................92

T

L

(Shutter & Aperture Priority

Automatic Exposure) mode ....97

Text Size ........................61, 257

Toning (Custom Image) .......198

Toy Camera (Digital Filter)

.....................................143, 233

Trailing Curtain Sync ............164

Tungsten Light (White Balance)

.............................................183

TV .........................................224

b

(Shutter Priority Automatic

Exposure) mode .....................94

U

USB cable ............................280

USB Connection ...................279

USER Mode .........................202

V

Vertical position ......................30

Vibrant (Custom Image) .......197

Video input terminal ............. 224

Video output format .............. 225

Viewfinder ........................ 36, 58

Vignetting ............................... 69

W

Water Color (Digital Filter) ... 233

White Balance ...................... 183

Windows .............................. 278

Wireless Mode (Flash) ......... 170

World Time ........................... 253

Write-protect ............................ 6

X

M

(Flash X-sync Speed) mode

............................................. 102

X-sync socket ....................... 175

Z

Zoom lens .............................. 68

WARRANTY POLICY

327

All PENTAX cameras purchased through authorized bona fide photographic distribution channels are guaranteed against defects of material or workmanship for a period of twelve months from date of purchase. Service will be rendered, and defective parts will be replaced without cost to you within that period, provided the equipment does not show evidence of impact, sand or liquid damage, mishandling, tampering, battery or chemical corrosion, operation contrary to operating instructions, or modification by an unauthorized repair shop. The manufacturer or its authorized representatives shall not be liable for any repair or alterations except those made with its written consent and shall not be liable for damages from delay or loss of use or from other indirect or consequential damages of any kind, whether caused by defective material or workmanship or otherwise; and it is expressly agreed that the liability of the manufacturer or its representatives under all guarantees or warranties, whether expressed or implied, is strictly limited to the replacement of parts as hereinbefore provided. No refunds will be made on repairs by nonauthorized PENTAX service facilities.

Procedure During 12-month Warranty Period

Any PENTAX which proves defective during the 12-month warranty period should be returned to the dealer from whom you purchased the equipment or to the manufacturer. If there are no representatives of the manufacturer in your country, send the equipment to the manufacturer, with postage prepaid. In this case, it will take a considerable length of time before the equipment can be returned to you owing to the complicated customs procedures required. If the equipment is covered by warranty, repairs will be made and parts replaced free of charge, and the equipment will be returned to you upon completion of servicing. If the equipment is not covered by warranty, regular charges of the manufacturer or of its representatives will apply. Shipping charges are to be borne by the owner.

If your PENTAX was purchased outside of the country where you wish to have it serviced during the warranty period, regular handling and servicing fees may be charged by the manufacturer’s representatives in that country. Notwithstanding this, your PENTAX returned to the manufacturer will be serviced free of charge according to this procedure and warranty policy. In any case, however, shipping charges and customs clearance fees to be borne by the sender. To prove the date of your purchase when required, please keep the receipt or bills covering the purchase of your equipment for at least a year. Before sending your equipment for servicing, please make sure that you are sending it to the manufacturer’s authorized

11

328 representatives or their approved repair shops, unless you are sending it directly to the manufacturer. Always obtain a quotation for the service charge, and only after you accept the quoted service charge, instruct the service station to proceed with the servicing.

• This warranty policy does not affect the customer’s statutory rights.

• The local warranty policies available from PENTAX distributors in some countries can supersede this warranty policy. Therefore, we recommend that you review the warranty card supplied with your product at the time of purchase, or contact the PENTAX distributor in your country for more information and to receive a copy of the warranty policy.

11

The CE Mark is a Directive conformity mark of the European

Union.

For customers in USA

STATEMENT OF FCC COMPLIANCE

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

Changes or modifications not approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.

This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a

Class B digital device, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules.

These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation.

If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:

• Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.

• Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.

• Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.

* Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.

329

For customers in Canada

This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003.

Pour les utilisateurs au Canada

Cet appareil numérique de la classe B est conforme à la norme NMB-003 du Canada.

FOR CALIFORNIA, U.S.A. ONLY

Perchlorate Material-special handling may apply.

The lithium battery used in this camera contains perchlorate material, which may require special handling.

See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate

11

330

Declaration of Conformity

According to 47CFR, Parts 2 and 15 for

Class B Personal Computers and Peripherals

11

We: PENTAX RICOH IMAGING AMERICAS

CORPORATION

Located at: 633 17 Street, Suite 2600

Denver, Colorado 80202 U.S.A.

Phone: 800-877-0155 FAX: 303-790-1131

Declare under sole responsibility that the product identified herein complies with 47CFR Parts 2 and 15 of the FCC rules as a Class B digital device. Each product marketed is identical to the representative unit tested and found to be compliant with the standards. Records maintained continue to reflect the equipment being produced can be expected to be within the variation accepted, due to quantity production and testing on the statistical basis as required by 47CFR §2.909. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. The above named party is responsible for ensuring that the equipment complies with the standards of 47CFR §15.101 to §15.109.

Product Name: Digital Single Lens Reflex Camera

Model Number: K-5

II

/K-5

II

s

Contact person: Customer Service Manager

Date and Place: September, 2012, Colorado

Information for Users on Collection and Disposal of Old

Equipment and Used Batteries

1. In the European Union

These symbols on the products, packaging and/or accompanying documents mean that used electrical and electronic equipment and batteries should not be mixed with general household waste.

Used electrical/electronic equipment and batteries must be treated separately and in accordance with legislation that requires proper treatment, recovery and recycling of these products.

By disposing of these products correctly you will help ensure that the waste undergoes the necessary treatment, recovery and recycling and thus prevent potential negative effects on the environment and human health which could otherwise arise due to inappropriate waste handling.

If a chemical symbol is added beneath the symbol shown above, in accordance with the Battery Directive, this indicates that a heavy metal

(Hg = Mercury, Cd = Cadmium, Pb = Lead) is present in the battery at a concentration above an applicable threshold specified in the Battery

Directive.

For more information about collection and recycling of used products, please contact your local authorities, your waste disposal service or the point of sale where you purchased the products.

331

2. In other countries outside the EU

These symbols are only valid in the European Union. If you wish to discard used products, please contact your local authorities or dealer and ask for the correct method of disposal.

For Switzerland: Used electrical/electronic equipment can be returned free of charge to the dealer, even when you don't purchase a new product.

Further collection facilities are listed on the home page of www.swico.ch or www.sens.ch.

11

Memo

Memo

PENTAX RICOH IMAGING CO., LTD.

2-35-7, Maeno-cho, Itabashi-ku, Tokyo 174-8639, JAPAN

(http://www.pentax.jp)

PENTAX RICOH IMAGING

FRANCE S.A.S.

(European Headquarters)

112 Quai de Bezons, B.P. 204, 95106 Argenteuil Cedex,

FRANCE

(HQ - http://www.pentax.eu)

(France - http://www.pentax.fr)

PENTAX RICOH IMAGING

DEUTSCHLAND GmbH

Julius-Vosseler-Strasse 104, 22527 Hamburg,

GERMANY

(http://www.pentax.de)

PENTAX RICOH IMAGING

UK LTD.

PENTAX House, Heron Drive, Langley, Slough, Berks

SL3 8PN, U.K.

(http://www.pentax.co.uk)

PENTAX RICOH IMAGING

AMERICAS CORPORATION

633 17th Street, Suite 2600, Denver, Colorado 80202,

U.S.A.

(http://www.pentaximaging.com)

PENTAX RICOH IMAGING

CANADA INC.

1770 Argentia Road Mississauga, Ontario L5N 3S7,

CANADA

(http://www.pentax.ca)

PENTAX RICOH IMAGING

CHINA CO., LTD.

23D, Jun Yao International Plaza, 789 Zhaojiabang Road,

Xu Hui District, Shanghai, 200032, CHINA

(http://www.pentax.com.cn)

http://www.pentax.jp/english

SLR Digital Camera

Operating Manual

• Specifications and external dimensions are subject to change without notice.

58288 Copyright © PENTAX RICOH IMAGING CO., LTD. 2012

R01DTI12 Printed in Philippines

For optimum camera performance, please read the

Operating Manual before using the camera.